WO2021218977A1 - Display device and application program interface display method - Google Patents

Display device and application program interface display method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021218977A1
WO2021218977A1 PCT/CN2021/090332 CN2021090332W WO2021218977A1 WO 2021218977 A1 WO2021218977 A1 WO 2021218977A1 CN 2021090332 W CN2021090332 W CN 2021090332W WO 2021218977 A1 WO2021218977 A1 WO 2021218977A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
application
display
mode
display device
user
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/090332
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张凡文
王楷
牛峰
郭伟
薛梅
马志峰
赖园园
Original Assignee
聚好看科技股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202010523653.3A external-priority patent/CN111669621B/en
Priority claimed from CN202010976268.4A external-priority patent/CN112073787B/en
Priority claimed from CN202011016939.9A external-priority patent/CN112162809B/en
Application filed by 聚好看科技股份有限公司 filed Critical 聚好看科技股份有限公司
Priority to CN202180046333.6A priority Critical patent/CN116261857A/en
Publication of WO2021218977A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021218977A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47End-user applications
    • H04N21/475End-user interface for inputting end-user data, e.g. personal identification number [PIN], preference data

Definitions

  • the application list in the application program interface is generated according to the local applications in the preset displayable application list, wherein the preset displayable application list is similar to the non-standard mode correspond.
  • FIG. 1 is a scene of a display device and a server in some embodiments of the application
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the homepage of the education mode in some embodiments of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a display screen without learning records in some embodiments of this application.
  • Step S405E Receive an operation instruction of one of the grade option controls input by the user.
  • the display device receives the user's operation instruction.
  • the operation instruction of the grade option control can be a touch signal
  • the touch screen of the display device sends the touch signal of the grade option control
  • the controller of the display device determines the grade option control touched by the user according to the coordinate area corresponding to the touch signal.
  • the validity period of the activity can also be set in the operation activity.
  • the operation server will sell the corresponding media assets and remove them from the shelves.
  • the activity interface for a live course may be displayed as the interface shown in FIG. 15.
  • the detailed information of the corresponding live course can be displayed, including the course name, lecturer information, class time information, live broadcast time, etc., and can also include specific event information, including original price, current price, start and end time, etc.
  • the media asset request may include user information and display interface types.
  • the user information as the identification information of different users, can be a user account logged in the current operating system, or different user information can be selected according to different operation modes. For example, in the display device 200 with an education mode, after the user chooses to enter the education mode, he can select different combinations of information such as age, grade, and main learning content according to preset options, so as to generate a corresponding combination of information.
  • the user information is sent to the server 400.
  • S233B If any one of the operational online/offline status, the third-party online/offline status, and the sold-out status is an offline state, set the online/offline status of the media asset to be displayed as an offline state.
  • a terminal-oriented system interface and a content system interface can be further provided, and different processing modules can be activated by calling different interfaces.
  • the extracted data can be filtered through the filtering module in the content system. If the display interface type is the first type interface, it is determined that the off-shelf media assets in the issued data need to be deleted, so the filtering module can be started, that is, the entry parameter of the filtering module in the content system can be set to true.
  • the filtering module can delete all media assets marked as offline in the distributed data during operation.
  • 30 application programs are installed in the display device 200, and 3 of them are educational applications.
  • the application program interface display method in the above embodiment is not used, the user needs to display 30 application programs in the application program interface. Find these 3 application icons in the icons. The user is required to press the arrow keys on the control device 100 multiple times to move the focus cursor to the icon of the educational application to be started.
  • the above feedback manner of the displayable application list can enable the server 300 to quickly feed back the displayable application list to the display device 200, reducing the waiting time for the user to enter the application program interface.
  • a unified message entry control may be provided on the part of the interface of the operating system of the display device 200. For example, there is a message entry control in the top status bar of the control homepage. When the user performs an interactive action and clicks on the message entry control, the user can jump to the message interface.
  • the difference between the mobile terminal prompt information and the full-screen operation is that the TV interface contains a lot of space, and the prompt only occupies a small area.
  • the control does not respond, and the display of the operation prompt responds (such as switching, canceling, etc.).
  • the control responds and cancels the operation prompt.
  • the user can input a special topic collection instruction on the topic details interface.
  • the way for the user to input the special collection instruction may include: clicking the special collection control on the touch screen of the display device, or selecting and confirming the special collection control through the remote control, or triggering the special collection control through a voice command.
  • Step S203D receiving the instruction to start the favorite interface input by the user, and in response to the instruction to start the favorite interface, controlling the display to display the favorite interface according to the favorite data of the preset topic type.
  • the server when the user enters the homepage of the second scene mode, the server will issue media asset recommendation data to the display device, so that the display device generates the homepage based on the media asset recommendation data.
  • the media asset recommendation data may include a second mode identifier, and the second mode identifier may include a productcode (product code) of a preset topic type, such as productCode#educationion.
  • the display device stores the second mode identifier, and obtains the second mode identifier after the user inputs an instruction to start the favorite interface.
  • the second collection interface can be a collection interface of an education topic, and can be provided with a topic navigation bar, and the topic navigation bar can include two topics.
  • Type controls such as "education” and “topic”, these two topic type controls can display the collection data of the education topic type on the second collection interface in response to triggering.
  • the operation subsystem may deliver the layout data to the online subsystem, and the layout data may include the layout data of the topic details page. Further, in some embodiments, the operator may assign a type to each topic, and the type may be represented as productCode. When the operation subsystem delivers the arrangement data, the productCode of the topic may be sent to the online subsystem at the same time. Because in the education mode, all the topic types are education, therefore, the operation subsystem can issue "productCode#Education" to the online subsystem.
  • the display device after the user inputs the second collection display instruction, the display device generates a my collection-topic request according to the second collection display instruction.
  • the display device sets the productCode#Education in the my collection-topic request according to the topic type education that can be displayed in the education mode.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a display device and an application program interface display method. The method can be applied to a display device. The method comprises: after a user inputs a control instruction for displaying an application program interface, determining a current operation mode of a display device; if the current operation mode is a non-standard mode, acquiring a presentable application list from a server, and matching a local application from the presentable application list according to package name information; and if package name information of the local application can be matched from the presentable application list, displaying the local application on the application program interface. By means of the method, local applications can be screened in an education mode, such that only application programs related to the education mode are displayed on an application program interface in the education mode, thereby facilitating a user to start the running of an education-type application, and solving the problem that traditional smart televisions require a relatively long time to find an education-type application program from among numerous application programs.

Description

一种显示设备及应用程序界面显示方法Display device and application program interface display method
本申请要求在2020年4月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010364836.5、发明名称为“一种显示设备教育模式显示方法”的中国专利申请,在2020年6月15日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010544468.2、发明名称为“一种消息补发方法、服务器及显示设备”的中国专利申请,在2020年6月10日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010523653.3、发明名称为“一种媒资数据下发方法、服务器及显示设备”的中国专利申请,在2020年6月17日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010555094.4、发明名称为“一种显示设备及应用程序界面显示方法”的中国专利申请,在2020年9月24日提交中国专利局、申请号为202011016939.9、发明名称为“一种显示设备及用户收藏显示方法”的中国专利申请,在2020年9月16日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010976268.4、发明名称为“一种显示设备及首页显示方法”的中国专利申请的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires a Chinese patent application with an application number of 202010364836.5 and an invention title of "A display device education mode display method" submitted to the Chinese Patent Office on April 30, 2020, and submitted to the Chinese Patent Office on June 15, 2020. The application number is 202010544468. 2, and the Chinese patent application with the title of the invention titled "A message reissuing method, server and display device" was submitted to the Chinese Patent Office on June 10, 2020, the application number is 202010523653.3, and the invention title is "A kind of media The Chinese patent application for “Data Distribution Method, Server and Display Device” was submitted to the Chinese Patent Office on June 17, 2020, the application number is 202010555094.4, and the title of the invention is “a display device and application program interface display method”. Patent application, submitted to the China Patent Office on September 24, 2020, with the application number 202011016939.9, and the invention title is "a display device and user collection display method" Chinese patent application, submitted to the China Patent Office on September 16, 2020 The priority of the Chinese patent application of the Chinese patent application whose application number is 202010976268.4 and the invention title is "a display device and homepage display method", the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及智能电视技术领域,尤其涉及一种显示设备及应用程序界面显示方法。This application relates to the technical field of smart TVs, and in particular to a display device and an application program interface display method.
背景技术Background technique
智能电视是基于Internet应用技术,具备开放式操作系统与芯片,拥有开放式应用平台,可实现双向人机交互功能,集影音、娱乐、数据等多种功能于一体的电视产品,用于满足用户多样化和个性化需求。智能电视可以依赖于网络以及多种信号源,为用户提供多种媒体资源,满足不同用户的观看需要。Smart TV is a TV product based on Internet application technology, with an open operating system and chip, an open application platform, which can realize two-way human-computer interaction, and integrates multiple functions such as audio and video, entertainment, and data, to satisfy users Diversified and personalized needs. Smart TVs can rely on the network and multiple signal sources to provide users with multiple media resources to meet the viewing needs of different users.
随着远程教育的普及,通过智能电视实现远程教育的需求也越来越迫切。现有智能电视实现远程教育的方式通常为在电视中安装教育类应用程序,以通过教育类应用程序获取远程教育资源,如课程视频等。作为第三方应用程序,教育类应用程序可以和其他应用程序一起展示在智能电视的应用列表中,以供用户选择并启动运行。With the popularization of distance education, the need to realize distance education through smart TV is becoming more and more urgent. An existing smart TV implements distance education in a way that usually installs educational applications on the TV, so as to obtain distance education resources, such as course videos, through the educational applications. As a third-party application, educational applications can be displayed in the application list of the smart TV together with other applications for users to select and start running.
发明内容Summary of the invention
第一方面,本申请提供一种显示设备,包括:显示器、通信器以及控制器。其中,所示显示器被配置为显示应用程序界面;所述通信器被配置为与服务器进行数据通信;所述控制器被配置为执行以下程序步骤:In the first aspect, the present application provides a display device, including: a display, a communicator, and a controller. Wherein, the display shown is configured to display an application program interface; the communicator is configured to perform data communication with the server; the controller is configured to execute the following program steps:
接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Receive control instructions for displaying the application program interface;
在标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据全部本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表;In the standard mode, in response to the control instruction, generate an application list in the application program interface according to all local applications;
在非标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据在预置可展示应用列表中的本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表,其中所述预置可展示应用列表和所述非标准模式相对应。In the non-standard mode, in response to the control instruction, the application list in the application program interface is generated according to the local applications in the preset displayable application list, wherein the preset displayable application list is similar to the non-standard mode correspond.
第二方面,本申请提供一种显示设备,包括:显示器、通信器以及控制器。其中,所 示显示器被配置为显示应用程序界面;所述通信器被配置为与服务器进行数据通信;所述控制器被配置为执行以下程序步骤:In a second aspect, the present application provides a display device including: a display, a communicator, and a controller. Wherein, the display shown is configured to display an application program interface; the communicator is configured to perform data communication with the server; and the controller is configured to execute the following program steps:
接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Receive control instructions for displaying the application program interface;
响应于所述控制指令,从服务器中获取可展示应用列表;In response to the control instruction, obtain a list of displayable applications from the server;
根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用;Match the local application in the displayable application list according to the package name information;
如果在所述可展示应用列表中匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,在所述应用程序界面中显示所述本地应用;If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, display the local application in the application program interface;
如果在所述可展示应用列表中未匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,隐藏所述本地应用。If the package name information of the local application is not matched in the displayable application list, the local application is hidden.
第三方面,本申请还提供一种应用程序界面显示方法,包括:In the third aspect, this application also provides an application program interface display method, including:
接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Receive control instructions for displaying the application program interface;
在标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据全部本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表;In the standard mode, in response to the control instruction, generate an application list in the application program interface according to all local applications;
在非标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据在预置可展示应用列表中的本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表,其中所述预置可展示应用列表和所述非标准模式相对应。In the non-standard mode, in response to the control instruction, the application list in the application program interface is generated according to the local applications in the preset displayable application list, wherein the preset displayable application list is similar to the non-standard mode correspond.
第四方面,本申请还提供一种应用程序界面显示方法,包括:In a fourth aspect, this application also provides an application program interface display method, including:
接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Receive control instructions for displaying the application program interface;
响应于所述控制指令,从服务器中获取可展示应用列表;In response to the control instruction, obtain a list of displayable applications from the server;
根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用;Match the local application in the displayable application list according to the package name information;
如果在所述可展示应用列表中匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,在所述应用程序界面中显示所述本地应用;If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, display the local application in the application program interface;
如果在所述可展示应用列表中未匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,隐藏所述本地应用。If the package name information of the local application is not matched in the displayable application list, the local application is hidden.
第五方面,本申请还提供一种服务器,包括:运营子系统、推荐子系统以及在线子系统。其中,所述运营子系统被配置为生成可展示应用列表;所述推荐子系统被配置为生成推荐应用列表;所述在线子系统被配置为:In a fifth aspect, this application also provides a server, including: an operation subsystem, a recommendation subsystem, and an online subsystem. Wherein, the operation subsystem is configured to generate a displayable application list; the recommendation subsystem is configured to generate a recommended application list; and the online subsystem is configured to:
接收显示设备发送的显示请求;Receive the display request sent by the display device;
响应于所述显示请求,从所述运营子系统获取可展示应用列表,以及从所述推荐子系统获取推荐应用列表;In response to the display request, obtaining a list of displayable applications from the operation subsystem, and obtaining a list of recommended applications from the recommendation subsystem;
向显示设备发送所述可展示应用列表和所述推荐应用列表。Send the displayable application list and the recommended application list to a display device.
附图说明Description of the drawings
为了更清楚地说明本申请的技术方案,下面将对实施例中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,对于本领域普通技术人员而言,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to explain the technical solution of the present application more clearly, the following will briefly introduce the drawings needed in the embodiments. Obviously, for those of ordinary skill in the art, without creative work, Other drawings can be obtained from these drawings.
图1为本申请一些实施例中显示设备与服务器的场景;FIG. 1 is a scene of a display device and a server in some embodiments of the application;
图2为本申请一些实施例中模式选择界面示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a mode selection interface in some embodiments of the application;
图3为本申请一些实施例中密码输入界面示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of a password input interface in some embodiments of the application;
图4为本申请一些实施例中年级选择界面示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of a middle-grade selection interface in some embodiments of this application;
图5为本申请一些实施例中教育模式主页示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the homepage of the education mode in some embodiments of the application;
图6为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的首页显示的交互示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of interaction displayed on the homepage according to some embodiments in some embodiments of the application; FIG.
图7为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的标准模式的首页示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the home page of the standard mode according to some embodiments in some embodiments of the application; FIG.
图8为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的第二首页进入方法的流程示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a second homepage entry method according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图9为本申请一些实施例中教育模式主页显示区域示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the display area of the education mode homepage in some embodiments of this application;
图10为本申请一些实施例中我的频道布局结构示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the layout structure of my channel in some embodiments of this application;
图11为本申请一些实施例中学习频道界面示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a learning channel interface in some embodiments of this application;
图12为本申请一些实施例中填充学习记录区域显示位效果示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the effect of filling the display bits of the learning record area in some embodiments of the application; FIG.
图13为本申请一些实施例中无学习记录显示画面示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a display screen without learning records in some embodiments of this application;
图14为本申请一些实施例中无购买课程显示画面示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a display screen of no course purchased in some embodiments of the application;
图15为本申请一些实施例中显示设备第一类界面示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a first type interface of a display device in some embodiments of this application;
图16为本申请一些实施例中显示设备第一类界面已购买媒资后示意图;16 is a schematic diagram of the first type interface of the display device in some embodiments of the application after media assets have been purchased;
图17为本申请一些实施例中显示设备第二类界面示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a second type interface of a display device in some embodiments of this application;
图18为本申请一些实施例中媒资数据下发方法流程示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of a method for distributing media asset data in some embodiments of this application;
图19为本申请一些实施例中标记下架媒资流程示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of the process of marking off-shelf media assets in some embodiments of this application;
图20为本申请一些实施例中设置待显示媒资的上下线状态的流程示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of setting the online and offline status of media assets to be displayed in some embodiments of this application;
图21为本申请一些实施例中设置过滤模块入口参数的流程示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the flow of setting the entry parameters of the filtering module in some embodiments of the application;
图22为本申请一些实施例中应用频道显示示意图;FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of application channel display in some embodiments of this application;
图23为本申请一些实施例中标准模式主页显示区域布局示意图;FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of the layout of the standard mode homepage display area in some embodiments of the application;
图24为本申请一些实施例中教育模式主页滑动触控操作示意图;FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram of a sliding touch operation of an education mode homepage in some embodiments of this application;
图25为本申请一些实施例中切换模式操作流程示意图;FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram of the operation flow of switching modes in some embodiments of this application;
图26为本申请一些实施例中返回控件示意图;FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram of the return control in some embodiments of this application;
图27为本申请一些实施例中一种消息补发的时序图;FIG. 27 is a sequence diagram of a message reissue in some embodiments of this application;
图28为本申请一些实施例中显示设备消息显示界面示意图;FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram of a display device message display interface in some embodiments of this application;
图29为本申请一些实施例中标准模式下展示应用的界面;FIG. 29 is an interface for displaying applications in standard mode in some embodiments of this application;
图30为本申请一些实施例中教育模式下展示应用的界面;FIG. 30 is an interface for displaying applications in the education mode in some embodiments of this application;
图31为本申请一些实施例中应用程序界面本地应用显示流程示意图;FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram of a local application display process of an application program interface in some embodiments of this application;
图32为本申请一些实施例中显示请求数据流程示意图;FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram of a flow of displaying request data in some embodiments of this application;
图33为本申请一些实施例中推荐应用示意图;FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of recommended applications in some embodiments of this application;
图34为本申请一些实施例中根据当前显示模式显示应用程序界面的流程示意图;FIG. 34 is a schematic flowchart of displaying an application program interface according to the current display mode in some embodiments of the application;
图35为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的用户收藏显示方法的流程示意图;FIG. 35 is a schematic flowchart of a method for displaying user favorites according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图36为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的标准模式下用户与显示设备的交互方法的流程示意图;FIG. 36 is a schematic flowchart of a method for interaction between a user and a display device in a standard mode according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图37为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的标准模式的首页示意图;FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of the home page of the standard mode according to some embodiments in some embodiments of the application; FIG.
图38为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的专题详情界面的示意图;FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of a topic details interface according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图39为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的显示设备对启动收藏界面的指令的响应方法的流程示意图;FIG. 39 is a schematic flowchart of a method for responding to an instruction to start a collection interface by a display device according to some embodiments in some embodiments of the application; FIG.
图40为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的第一收藏指令发送方法的流程示意图;FIG. 40 is a schematic flowchart of a first collection instruction sending method according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图41为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的第一收藏界面的示意图;FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram of a first collection interface according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图42为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的标准模式下的显示设备与服务器的交互示意图;FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of interaction between a display device and a server in a standard mode according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图43为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的第二收藏界面的示意图;FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram of a second collection interface according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图44为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的教育模式的首页示意图;FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of the home page of the education mode according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图45为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的专题详情界面的示意图;FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram of a topic details interface according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图46为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的第二收藏界面的示意图;FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of a second collection interface according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application; FIG.
图47为本申请一些实施例中根据一些实施例的教育模式下的显示设备与服务器的交互示意图。FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram of the interaction between the display device and the server in the education mode according to some embodiments in some embodiments of this application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将详细地对实施例进行说明,其示例表示在附图中。下面的描述涉及附图时,除非另有表示,不同附图中的相同数字表示相同或相似的要素。以下实施例中描述的实施方式并不代表与本申请相一致的所有实施方式。仅是与权利要求书中所详述的、本申请的一些方面相一致的系统和方法的示例。The embodiments will be described in detail below, and examples thereof are shown in the accompanying drawings. When the following description refers to the accompanying drawings, unless otherwise indicated, the same numbers in different drawings represent the same or similar elements. The implementation manners described in the following examples do not represent all implementation manners consistent with this application. It is only an example of a system and method consistent with some aspects of the present application as detailed in the claims.
图1中示例性示出了根据实施例中显示设备与服务器的场景。如图1中示出,用户可通过移动终端300和控制装置100操作显示设备200。Fig. 1 exemplarily shows a scene of a display device and a server according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the user can operate the display device 200 through the mobile terminal 300 and the control device 100.
在一些实施例中,控制装置100可以是遥控器,遥控器和显示设备的通信包括红外协议通信或蓝牙协议通信,及其他短距离通信方式等,通过无线或其他有线方式来控制显示设备200。用户可以通过遥控器上按键,语音输入、控制面板输入等输入用户指令,来控制显示设备200。如:用户可以通过遥控器上音量加减键、频道控制键、上/下/左/右的移动按键、语音输入按键、菜单键、开关机按键等输入相应控制指令,来实现控制显示设备200的功能。In some embodiments, the control device 100 may be a remote controller, and the communication between the remote controller and the display device includes infrared protocol communication or Bluetooth protocol communication, and other short-range communication methods, and the display device 200 is controlled by wireless or other wired methods. The user can control the display device 200 by inputting user instructions through keys on the remote control, voice input, control panel input, etc. For example, the user can control the display device 200 by inputting corresponding control commands through the volume plus and minus keys, channel control keys, up/down/left/right movement keys, voice input keys, menu keys, and power on/off keys on the remote control. Function.
在一些实施例中,本申请提供一种显示设备教育模式显示方法,其中显示设备可以为具有触摸屏交互功能的智能电视,如触控电视。需要说明的是,本申请所述显示设备并不局限于上述触控电视,还可以是其他显示设备,如平板电脑等。In some embodiments, the present application provides a display method for displaying an education mode of a display device, wherein the display device may be a smart TV with a touch screen interactive function, such as a touch screen TV. It should be noted that the display device described in the present application is not limited to the above-mentioned touch-control TV, and may also be other display devices, such as a tablet computer.
开机启动后模式的选择Mode selection after booting
在一些实现方式中,如图2所示,显示设备在首次开机时,需要完成开机导航。开机导航主要包括对显示设备的进行一系列初始化基础设置。例如,选择操作界面语言、初始化连接网络、登录云服务账号等。开机导航相对应的设置程序,可以通过用户在连续多个界面设置界面中进行的交互完成。实际应用中,用户可先将显示设备接通电源;再开启显示设备上的实体电源按键或按下控制装置100上的开机键(电源键),触发开机事件,启动显示设备内置的操作系统;此时随着操作系统启动运行,可以加载预设的开机程序,直 至跳转至开机导航界面。In some implementation manners, as shown in FIG. 2, when the display device is turned on for the first time, it needs to complete the boot navigation. The boot navigation mainly includes a series of initial basic settings for the display device. For example, select the language of the operation interface, initialize the connection to the network, log in to the cloud service account, and so on. The setting procedure corresponding to the boot navigation can be completed by the user's interaction in multiple successive interface setting interfaces. In practical applications, the user can first power on the display device; then turn on the physical power button on the display device or press the power button (power button) on the control device 100 to trigger a power-on event and start the operating system built into the display device; At this time, as the operating system starts and runs, the preset boot program can be loaded until it jumps to the boot navigation interface.
开机导航界面可以根据控制逻辑预设显示顺序。例如,开机启动后,显示设备先显示品牌标志(logo),再显示欢迎界面,并过渡到选择操作界面语言的设置界面。在用户设置界面选择操作界面的语言后,按照所选择的语言显示网络连接设置界面。在网络连接设置界面中,用户可以选择可接入的任一无线或有线网络接入点,并输入相关的网络设置参数,如WiFi密码等。选择无线网络接入点后,显示设备可以通过选择的无线网络接入点连接提供云服务的服务器。因此,可以显示服务器的登录界面,以便用户在登录界面中输入用户名和密码,等待验证通过后连接至服务器,实现智能电视的正常资源获取与播放功能,以及享受UI更新、同步播放记录等服务。The boot navigation interface can preset the display sequence according to the control logic. For example, after booting up, the display device first displays the brand logo (logo), then displays the welcome interface, and transitions to the setting interface for selecting the language of the operation interface. After selecting the language of the operation interface in the user setting interface, the network connection setting interface is displayed according to the selected language. In the network connection setting interface, the user can select any wireless or wired network access point that can be accessed, and enter the relevant network setting parameters, such as WiFi password. After selecting the wireless network access point, the display device can connect to the server that provides cloud services through the selected wireless network access point. Therefore, the login interface of the server can be displayed so that the user enters the user name and password in the login interface, waits for the verification to be passed, and connects to the server to realize the normal resource acquisition and playback functions of the smart TV, and enjoy services such as UI update and synchronized playback records.
显然开机导航并不局限于上述设置方式,还可以包括其他设置程序界面。例如在连接服务器后,显示选择感兴趣视频类型的界面,界面中包括多个标签,如“电影、电视剧、音乐、戏曲、科技”等。用户在这些标签中选择感兴趣的视频类型,以便后续使用中,服务器可以向显示设备推送相关类型的视频资源。Obviously, the boot navigation is not limited to the above setting method, and may also include other setting program interfaces. For example, after connecting to the server, an interface for selecting the video type of interest is displayed, and the interface includes multiple tags, such as "movies, TV series, music, opera, technology", etc. The user selects the video type of interest in these tags, so that in subsequent use, the server can push related types of video resources to the display device.
在完成开机导航设置后,显示设备可以进一步显示模式选择界面。如图2所示,在模式选择界面中,可以包括多个模式对应的按钮控件,供用户进行选择。例如,在模式选择界面中包括两个可选择的操作模式控件,即“标准模式”和“教育模式”。其中,标准模式是指观看显示设备的常规模式,当用户点击标准模式后,可以使显示设备切换到标准模式的交互策略环境下,并显示标准模式对应的控制主页。教育模式是专门为远程教育设置的操作模式,当用户点击教育模式后,可以使显示设备切换到教育模式的交互策略环境下,并显示教育模式对应的控制主页。After completing the boot navigation settings, the display device can further display the mode selection interface. As shown in Fig. 2, in the mode selection interface, multiple button controls corresponding to the modes may be included for the user to select. For example, the mode selection interface includes two selectable operation mode controls, namely "standard mode" and "education mode". Among them, the standard mode refers to the normal mode of viewing the display device. When the user clicks on the standard mode, the display device can be switched to the interactive strategy environment of the standard mode, and the control homepage corresponding to the standard mode is displayed. The education mode is an operation mode specially set for distance education. When the user clicks on the education mode, the display device can be switched to the interactive strategy environment of the education mode, and the control homepage corresponding to the education mode is displayed.
在一些实施例中,用于显示教育模式的媒资包含在用户显示标准模式的媒资的范围内,媒资是指多媒体资源。示例性的,教育模式用于显示标准模式下的少儿频道和教育频道相关的媒资,不显示电影,推荐等频道的媒资。In some embodiments, the media assets used for displaying the education mode are included in the scope of the media assets displayed by the user in the standard mode, and the media assets refer to multimedia resources. Exemplarily, the education mode is used to display media assets related to children's channels and education channels in the standard mode, and media assets of channels such as movies and recommendations are not displayed.
在一些实施例中,模式选择界面中还可以包括用于指示用户进行模式选择的提示画面。例如,如图2所示,在“标准模式”和“教育模式”两个控件的背景,设置指定提示图案;并且在两个控件的下方设置提示文字,如“请选择你想使用的模式,进入主页后,仍可随意切换电视模式”,从而通过图形或者文字引导用户完成模式选择操作。In some embodiments, the mode selection interface may further include a prompt screen for instructing the user to select the mode. For example, as shown in Figure 2, set the designated prompt pattern on the background of the two controls of "Standard Mode" and "Education Mode"; and set the prompt text below the two controls, such as "Please select the mode you want to use, After entering the homepage, you can still switch the TV mode at will, so as to guide the user to complete the mode selection operation through graphics or text.
在模式选择界面中,还可以根据显示设备的运行情况将焦点标志默认设置在一个模式控件上。例如,可以在弹出模式选择界面后,将焦点标志默认设置在教育模式对应的控件上。用户可以根据想要进入的操作模式,控制焦点标志移到其他控件上。例如,用户通过控制装置(遥控器)上的“左”按键,将焦点标志移动到标准模式对应的控件上。显然,所述焦点标志可以根据不同的界面风格呈现不同的显示形状。例如,焦点标志可以是将控件进行框选的方框;还可以是对控件进行高亮处理或变更颜色的处理标志,从而指示焦点所处的位置。In the mode selection interface, the focus flag can also be set on a mode control by default according to the operating conditions of the display device. For example, after the mode selection interface pops up, the focus flag can be set on the control corresponding to the education mode by default. The user can control the focus mark to move to other controls according to the operation mode they want to enter. For example, the user uses the "left" button on the control device (remote control) to move the focus mark to the control corresponding to the standard mode. Obviously, the focus mark can present different display shapes according to different interface styles. For example, the focus mark can be a box that selects the control; it can also be a processing mark for highlighting or changing the color of the control, thereby indicating the position of the focus.
在一些实施方式中,显示设备所呈现的模式选择界面还可以根据用户控制动作的变化而变化。例如,随着焦点标志在两个控件之间切换,界面上的提示图案和提示文字也随之 发生变化,即转换为与控件模式相对应的说明界面和说明内容。In some embodiments, the mode selection interface presented by the display device may also change according to the change of the user's control action. For example, as the focus mark is switched between the two controls, the prompt pattern and prompt text on the interface will also change, that is, the description interface and description content corresponding to the control mode will be converted.
当用户在模式选择界面中选中“教育模式”控件后,显示设备的操作系统可以进一步跳转至与教育模式相关的界面中。When the user selects the "education mode" control in the mode selection interface, the operating system of the display device can further jump to the interface related to the education mode.
在一种示意性实施方式中,在选中“教育模式”控件后,可以弹出验证界面。在验证界面中可以包括输入框,以供用户输入用户名和密码。还可以包括与验证相关的其他控件,例如“登录”控件。在用户输入用户名和密码后,通过选中登录控件,指示显示设备将用户输入的用户名和密码信息发送给服务器进行验证。如果验证通过,则继续显示其他教育模式相关界面;如果验证失败,则显示设备显示验证失败提示画面,或者退出教育模式。In an exemplary embodiment, after selecting the "education mode" control, a verification interface may pop up. An input box may be included in the verification interface for the user to enter the user name and password. It can also include other controls related to authentication, such as a "login" control. After the user enters the user name and password, by selecting the login control, the display device is instructed to send the user name and password information entered by the user to the server for verification. If the verification is passed, the relevant interface of other education modes will continue to be displayed; if the verification fails, the display device will display a verification failure prompt screen, or exit the education mode.
本实施例中,验证失败提示画面还可以对验证失败的原因进行展示,例如,当用户输入的信息错误时,可以在提示画面中显示“输入的用户名或密码错误,请重新输出”;当由于网络原因使得在预设时间内没有获取到验证结果,则可以在提示画面中显示“连接超时/无法连接到服务器,请重试”等提示文字。In this embodiment, the verification failure prompt screen can also display the reason for the verification failure. For example, when the information entered by the user is wrong, the prompt screen can display "The entered user name or password is wrong, please output again"; Due to network reasons, if the verification result is not obtained within the preset time, the prompt text such as "connection timeout/cannot connect to the server, please try again" can be displayed on the prompt screen.
由于教育模式与标准模式是同一显示设备下的两种操作模式,因此在部分实施例中,在验证界面,可以与标准模式共用同一个用户名,只需要进入/退出教育模式的时候输入密码即可。Since the education mode and the standard mode are two operation modes under the same display device, in some embodiments, the authentication interface can share the same user name with the standard mode. You only need to enter the password when entering/exiting the education mode. Can.
在一种示意性实施方式中,还可以为教育模式设置独立的进入密码,即家长密码。相应的,在模式选择界面选中教育模式后,直接弹出密码界面,如图3所示。在密码界面中,可以显示虚拟键盘控件,以供用户输入密码信息。为了便于在显示设备上完成交互操作,也便于简化用户输入字符数量,教育模式对应的进入密码可以为纯数字密码,例如位数是4位或者6位的简单密码。相应的,在密码界面中显示的虚拟键盘控件也可以为纯数字键盘控件。In an exemplary embodiment, an independent entry password, that is, a parent password, can also be set for the education mode. Correspondingly, after selecting the education mode in the mode selection interface, the password interface will pop up directly, as shown in Figure 3. In the password interface, a virtual keyboard control can be displayed for the user to enter password information. In order to facilitate the completion of interactive operations on the display device and to simplify the number of characters input by the user, the entry password corresponding to the education mode can be a pure digital password, such as a simple password with 4 or 6 digits. Correspondingly, the virtual keyboard control displayed in the password interface can also be a pure numeric keyboard control.
对于教育模式设置的独立进入密码,可以在输入密码后,由显示设备对进入密码进行验证,以便快速获得验证结果,完成验证;也可以将密码发送给服务器进行验证,并通过服务器返回验证结果,以便在不同的显示设备上无需多次设置密码。For the independent entry password set in the education mode, the entry password can be verified by the display device after the password is entered, so as to quickly obtain the verification result and complete the verification; the password can also be sent to the server for verification, and the server returns the verification result. So that there is no need to set a password multiple times on different display devices.
在一种实现方式中,为了进入教育模式对应的控制主页,还可以在密码验证通过后,显示用于限定控制主页内容的等级选择界面,如年级选择界面、年龄选择界面等。如图3所示,在年级选择界面中可以根据实际教育体系,预设多个等级选项,例如“少儿、一年级、二年级、……、高三”等。用户通过遥控器实施交互操作或直接触控移动焦点标志,可以对相应的选项进行选择。在用户选择相应的年级选项以后,显示设备会将所选择的年级选项标签信息发送给服务器,以便服务器根据所选择的年级选项向显示设备推送相关教育资源内容,以显示在控制主页中。In an implementation manner, in order to enter the control homepage corresponding to the education mode, after the password verification is passed, a level selection interface for limiting the content of the control homepage, such as a grade selection interface, an age selection interface, etc., may also be displayed. As shown in Figure 3, in the grade selection interface, multiple grade options can be preset according to the actual education system, such as "children, first grade, second grade,..., senior third" and so on. The user implements interactive operations through the remote control or directly touches and moves the focus mark, and the corresponding options can be selected. After the user selects the corresponding grade option, the display device will send the selected grade option label information to the server, so that the server pushes the relevant educational resource content to the display device according to the selected grade option for display in the control homepage.
显然,可以在年级选择界面同时选择多个年级选项,以适应不同的教育需要,因此年级选择界面中的多个年级选项为复选选项。每个选项在被选择后,可以显示该选项已被选择的标记,如在该选项对应控件图案上添加一个圆点或一个对号。相应的在年级选择界面还可以设有“确定”控件,以便在选择多个选项后,通过点击确定控件,完成年级选择,以执行后续步骤。Obviously, multiple grade options can be selected in the grade selection interface at the same time to meet different educational needs, so multiple grade options in the grade selection interface are multiple selection options. After each option is selected, the mark that the option has been selected can be displayed, such as adding a dot or a check mark on the corresponding control pattern of the option. Correspondingly, the grade selection interface can also be provided with an "OK" control, so that after selecting multiple options, click the OK control to complete the grade selection to perform the subsequent steps.
需要说明的是,在跳转至年级选择界面时,可以在默认将焦点光标设置在第一个选项上,例如设置在图4中“少儿”对应的选项上,以便用户选择。也可以在开机导航步骤登录的用户名中,获取存储在服务器内的用户数据,从而根据与用户数据相适应的年级数据,并将焦点光标默认设置年级数据对应的选项上。It should be noted that when jumping to the grade selection interface, the focus cursor can be set on the first option by default, for example, on the option corresponding to "Junior" in Figure 4 for the user to select. It is also possible to obtain the user data stored in the server from the user name logged in the boot navigation step, so as to set the focus cursor to the option corresponding to the grade data by default based on the grade data suitable for the user data.
由于在年级选择界面中可以包括多个年级选择选项,根据不同的学龄划分方式,还可以包括更多可选的年级选择选项,因此,在显示的年级选择界面中,可能无法在一页画面中将所有选项进行完全显示。为此,可以通过卷轴显示的方式,将所有年级选项设置在年级选择界面中。例如,在图4所示的年级选择界面中,可以仅显示9个年级选项,即从“少儿”至“八年级”,形成3×3的选项阵列,并显示在显示器的中部区域内。而“九年级”至“高二”选项图标部分显示在屏幕的下边缘位置。当用户在焦点光标位于最下排(如位于“六年级”选项上),再按下遥控器的“下”按键;或者在屏幕进行上滑触控操作,则将“九年级”至“高二”选项图标上移,显示在屏幕中部区域内,以供用户选择。Since multiple grade selection options can be included in the grade selection interface, more optional grade selection options can also be included according to different school age classification methods, so in the displayed grade selection interface, it may not be on one page of the screen All options are fully displayed. To this end, you can set all the grade options in the grade selection interface through the scroll display. For example, in the grade selection interface shown in FIG. 4, only 9 grade options may be displayed, that is, from "children" to "eighth grade", forming a 3×3 array of options and displaying them in the middle area of the display. The "ninth grade" to "senior sophomore" option icons are partially displayed on the lower edge of the screen. When the user presses the "Down" button on the remote control when the focus cursor is at the bottom row (for example, on the "6th grade" option); The option icon moves up and is displayed in the middle area of the screen for users to choose.
在用户选择至少一个年级选项后,显示设备可以跳转至教育模式的控制主页,如图5所示。在显示教育模式主页的具体内容前,显示设备还可以向服务器发送包含所选的年级选项信息的主页请求指令。服务器可以响应于接收到的主页请求指令,根据其中包含的年级选项信息向显示设备返回主页配置文件。显示设备在接收到主页配置文件后,可以通过解析主页配置文件中的推荐资源,并在主页布局中添加相应的推荐资源的图像和链接。After the user selects at least one grade option, the display device can jump to the control homepage of the education mode, as shown in Figure 5. Before displaying the specific content of the education mode homepage, the display device may also send a homepage request instruction containing the selected grade option information to the server. In response to the received homepage request instruction, the server may return the homepage configuration file to the display device according to the grade option information contained therein. After the display device receives the homepage configuration file, it can parse the recommended resources in the homepage configuration file, and add corresponding images and links of the recommended resources in the homepage layout.
例如,在年级选择界面中,用户选中了“少儿”选项,在电机确认控件以后,显示设备可以向服务器发送带有“少儿”选项信息的主页请求指令。相应地,服务器可以在主页请求指令中获取“少儿”选项信息,根据预设推荐规则,提取面向少儿的课程资源内容的标签或链接,生成主页配置文件,并将主页配置文件返回给显示设备,以使显示设备显示相对应的教育模式主页。For example, in the grade selection interface, the user selects the "children" option. After the motor confirms the control, the display device can send a homepage request instruction with the information of the "children" option to the server. Correspondingly, the server can obtain the "children" option information in the homepage request instruction, extract the tags or links of the curriculum resource content for children according to the preset recommendation rules, generate the homepage configuration file, and return the homepage configuration file to the display device, In order to make the display device display the corresponding education mode homepage.
不同模式首页共用一组首页数据的实现Realization of sharing a set of homepage data on different homepages
在一些实施例中,显示设备可内置一个终端APP来展示媒资,模式选择界面可以是应用首次启动后的界面。为满足不同目标人群的观看需求,该终端APP可设置有多种场景模式,在不同的场景模式显示不同的媒资。当用户切换场景模式时,该终端APP需要将显示设备的当前页面切换至另一场景模式的首页。由于不同电视型号、不同的APP版本支持的首页数据可能存在差别,如果分别就每种电视型号、每种APP版本分别适配多个场景模式的首页,将会使得首页开发及维护成本大幅提高。In some embodiments, the display device may have a built-in terminal APP to display media assets, and the mode selection interface may be the interface after the application is launched for the first time. In order to meet the viewing needs of different target groups, the terminal APP can be set with multiple scene modes, and different media assets can be displayed in different scene modes. When the user switches the scene mode, the terminal APP needs to switch the current page of the display device to the home page of another scene mode. Since the homepage data supported by different TV models and different APP versions may be different, if you adapt the homepage of multiple scene modes separately for each TV model and each APP version, it will greatly increase the cost of homepage development and maintenance.
为解决上述问题,本申请将首页数据进行选择性展示,从而根据一份首页数据可虚拟出多个场景模式的首页,有效降低了首页开发及维护成本。In order to solve the above problems, this application selectively displays the homepage data, so that a homepage with multiple scene modes can be virtualized based on one homepage data, which effectively reduces the cost of homepage development and maintenance.
在一些实施例中,显示设备的场景模式可包括第一场景模式和第二场景模式,其中,第一场景模式可为标准模式,在该场景模式下,首页可展示多种类型的媒资,适合普通用户观看;第二场景模式可为教育模式,在该场景模式下,首页可只展示教育类型的媒资,适合儿童观看。In some embodiments, the scene mode of the display device may include a first scene mode and a second scene mode. The first scene mode may be a standard mode. In this scene mode, the homepage can display multiple types of media assets. Suitable for ordinary users to watch; the second scene mode can be an education mode, in this scene mode, the homepage can only display educational media resources, suitable for children to watch.
在一些实施例中,显示设备显示首页的方法可包括如下步骤:In some embodiments, the method for displaying the homepage on the display device may include the following steps:
接收用户输入的进入首页的操作指令;响应于所述进入首页的操作指令,从服务器中获取首页数据;根据所述首页的场景模式为第一场景模式,从所述首页数据中选取第一模式数据,根据所述第一模式数据控制显示器显示第一首页;根据所述首页的场景模式为第二场景模式,从所述首页数据中选取第二模式数据,根据所述第二模式数据控制所述显示器显示第二首页,其中,所述第二模式数据与所述第一模式数据不相同。Receive an operation instruction to enter the homepage input by the user; obtain homepage data from the server in response to the operation instruction for entering the homepage; select the first mode from the homepage data according to the scene mode of the homepage as the first scene mode Data, according to the first mode data to control the display to display the first homepage; according to the scene mode of the homepage as the second scene mode, select the second mode data from the homepage data, and control the station according to the second mode data The display displays a second home page, wherein the second mode data is different from the first mode data.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可在开机后默认进入标准模式的首页,因此,用户输入的进入首页的操作指令可为显示设备的开机指令。In some embodiments, the display device can enter the home page in the standard mode by default after being turned on. Therefore, the operation instruction to enter the home page input by the user may be a startup instruction of the display device.
在一些实施例中,用户可在显示设备为一种场景模式时,将显示设备切换为另一种场景模式,例如,将标准模式切换为教育模式,或将教育模式切换为标准模式,当显示设备进行场景模式切换时,需要展示新的场景模式的首页,因此,用户输入的进入首页的操作指令还可为切换场景模式的操作指令。In some embodiments, the user can switch the display device to another scene mode when the display device is in one scene mode, for example, switch the standard mode to the education mode, or switch the education mode to the standard mode. When the device switches the scene mode, it needs to display the home page of the new scene mode. Therefore, the operation instruction to enter the home page input by the user may also be an operation instruction to switch the scene mode.
在一些实施例中,用户在显示设备为一种场景模式时,从显示设备的首页进入一些二级页面、三级页面等页面,当用户返回至首页时,显示设备需要重新显示首页,因此,用户输入的进入首页的操作指令还可为从其他页面返回首页的操作指令。In some embodiments, when the display device is in a scene mode, the user enters some secondary pages, tertiary pages and other pages from the home page of the display device. When the user returns to the home page, the display device needs to display the home page again. Therefore, The operation instruction to enter the home page input by the user may also be an operation instruction to return to the home page from other pages.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可具有触摸控制、语音控制、遥控器控制、手机控制等多种控制方式,上述进入首页的操作指令可通过任意一种控制方式实现。In some embodiments, the display device may have multiple control methods such as touch control, voice control, remote control control, mobile phone control, etc. The above-mentioned operation instructions for entering the homepage can be implemented by any control method.
在一些实施例中,显示设备在接收到进入首页的操作指令后,与服务器建立通信连接,从服务器获取首页数据,并将首页数据进行缓存。In some embodiments, after receiving an operation instruction to enter the homepage, the display device establishes a communication connection with the server, obtains homepage data from the server, and caches the homepage data.
在一些实施例中,显示设备接收的首页数据包括多种场景模式的首页数据,如第一模式数据和第二模式数据,其中,第一模式数据用于生成第一场景模式的首页,第二模式数据用于生成第二场景模式的首页。显示设备可根据所述首页的场景模式为第一场景模式,从首页数据中筛选出第一模式数据,根据第一模式数据生成第一首页,控制显示器显示第一首页。In some embodiments, the homepage data received by the display device includes homepage data of multiple scene modes, such as first mode data and second mode data, where the first mode data is used to generate the homepage of the first scene mode, and the second The mode data is used to generate the first page of the second scene mode. The display device can filter the first mode data from the home page data according to the scene mode of the home page as the first scene mode, generate the first home page according to the first mode data, and control the display to display the first home page.
在一些实施例中,第一模式数据和第二模式数据可以是互斥的数据,使得第一首页和第二首页可显示完全不同的内容。第二模式数据可设置有预设标识,以与第一模式数据相区分。根据首页的场景模式为第一场景模式,可从首页数据中选取除了第二模式数据之外的数据,即没有设置预设标识的数据,作为第一模式数据。In some embodiments, the first mode data and the second mode data may be mutually exclusive data, so that the first homepage and the second homepage can display completely different content. The second mode data may be provided with a preset identifier to distinguish it from the first mode data. According to the scene mode of the homepage as the first scene mode, data other than the data of the second mode can be selected from the homepage data, that is, data without a preset identifier, as the first mode data.
在一些实施例中,第一模式数据和第二模式数据可以是部分相同的数据,例如,第一模式数据包含第二模式数据的全部或部分,除了第二模式数据,第一模式数据还可包含其他数据,使得第一首页和第二首页可显示部分不同的内容,只要能将第一首页和第二首页区分开即可。根据首页的场景模式为第一场景模式,可将全部的首页数据均作为第一模式数据。In some embodiments, the first mode data and the second mode data may be partially the same data. For example, the first mode data includes all or part of the second mode data. In addition to the second mode data, the first mode data may also be Other data is included so that the first home page and the second home page can display part of different content, as long as the first home page and the second home page can be distinguished. According to the scene mode of the homepage as the first scene mode, all the homepage data can be regarded as the first mode data.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可根据所述首页的场景模式为第二场景模式,从首页数据中筛选出第二模式数据,根据第二模式数据生成第二首页,控制显示器显示第二首页。In some embodiments, the display device may filter the second mode data from the home page data according to the scene mode of the home page as the second scene mode, generate the second home page according to the second mode data, and control the display to display the second home page.
在一些实施例中,第二模式数据可设置有预设标识,以与第一模式数据相区分。根据首页的场景模式为第二场景模式,可从首页数据中选取设置有预设标识的数据,作为第二 模式数据。In some embodiments, the second mode data may be provided with a preset identifier to distinguish it from the first mode data. According to the scene mode of the homepage as the second scene mode, the data with the preset identifier can be selected from the homepage data as the second mode data.
在一些实施例中,当用户在输入进入首页的操作指令后较短的时间内,又输入切换场景模式的操作指令,或者用户在输入切换场景模式的操作指令的较短时间内,又输入切换场景模式的操作指令,显示设备可接收用户新输入的切换场景模式的操作指令,从缓存的首页数据中选取另一种场景模式的首页数据,控制所述显示器将当前首页切换为所述切换场景模式的操作指令对应的首页。利用缓存的首页数据来切换首页,可提高首页切换速度,提升用户体验。In some embodiments, when the user inputs the operation instruction to switch the scene mode within a short time after inputting the operation instruction to enter the homepage, or the user inputs the operation instruction to switch the scene mode within a short time after inputting the operation instruction to switch the scene mode. Scene mode operation instruction, the display device can receive the operation instruction of switching scene mode newly input by the user, select the home page data of another scene mode from the cached home page data, and control the display to switch the current home page to the switching scene The home page corresponding to the operation command of the mode. Using cached homepage data to switch the homepage can increase the speed of homepage switching and improve user experience.
在一些实施例中,显示设备也可根据用户输入的切换场景模式的操作指令,重新从步骤接收用户输入的进入首页的操作指令开始执行,生成所述切换场景模式的操作指令对应的首页。In some embodiments, the display device may also start execution from the step of receiving the operation instruction to enter the homepage input by the user according to the operation instruction for switching scene mode input by the user, and generate the homepage corresponding to the operation instruction for switching scene mode.
为对显示设备获取的首页数据做进一步说明,本申请实施例还提供一种首页显示的交互示意图,参见图6,为根据一些实施例的首页显示的交互示意图。图6中,JUUI APP可为显示设备的终端APP,运营人员可利用CMS(Content Management System,内容管理系统)编排首页,进而存储至融合DB(data base,数据库)中。In order to further explain the home page data obtained by the display device, an embodiment of the present application also provides an interactive schematic diagram of the home page display. See FIG. 6, which is an interactive schematic diagram of the home page display according to some embodiments. In Figure 6, the JUUI APP can be a terminal APP of the display device, and the operator can use CMS (Content Management System, content management system) to organize the home page, and then store it in the converged DB (database, database).
在一些实施例中,运营人员编排的首页可包括标准模式首页和教育模式首页,其中,标准模式首页和教育模式首页均设置有三个层级:导航、频道、栏目,根据该层级设置,首页数据可分为多组导航数据,每组导航数据包括多组频道数据,每组频道数据可包括多个栏目数据。为了实现多种首页的显示效果,运营人员可将导航数据进行标记,以将多组导航数据划分给不同首页。In some embodiments, the homepage arranged by the operator may include a standard mode homepage and an education mode homepage, where both the standard mode homepage and the education mode homepage are set with three levels: navigation, channel, and column. According to this level setting, the homepage data can be Divided into multiple sets of navigation data, each set of navigation data includes multiple sets of channel data, and each set of channel data can include multiple column data. In order to achieve the display effects of multiple homepages, the operator can mark the navigation data to divide multiple sets of navigation data into different homepages.
在一些实施例中,一种导航数据的标记方式是:将需要在教育模式显示的导航数据设置一个预设标识,如edubox_,需要在标准模式显示的导航数据不设置导航标识,使得edubox_开头的导航数据属于在教育模式显示的数据,即第二模式数据,没有该导航标识的导航数据属于在标准模式显示的数据,即第一模式数据;或者,还可设置edubox_开头的导航数据属于在教育模式显示的数据,全部导航数据属于在标准模式显示的数据。In some embodiments, a way to mark navigation data is to set a preset identifier for navigation data that needs to be displayed in education mode, such as edubox_, and navigation data that needs to be displayed in standard mode do not set a navigation identifier, so that edubox_ starts with edubox_ The navigation data belongs to the data displayed in the education mode, that is, the second mode data. The navigation data without the navigation mark belongs to the data displayed in the standard mode, that is, the first mode data; or, the navigation data beginning with edubox_ can also be set to belong to In the data displayed in the education mode, all navigation data belong to the data displayed in the standard mode.
当然,实际实施中,并不限于上述标记方式,也可采用其他方式,如将需要在教育模式显示的导航数据和标准模式显示的导航数据分别设置一个不同的导航标识;或者只将需要在标准模式显示的导航数据设置一个导航标识,将需要在教育模式显示的导航数据不设置导航标识;或者将需要在教育模式显示的导航数据和标准模式显示的导航数据分别设置一个不同的状态数据,只要能将导航数据的场景模式区分开,使标准模式和教育模式显示不同的导航数据即可。Of course, in actual implementation, it is not limited to the above-mentioned marking methods, and other methods can also be used. For example, the navigation data that needs to be displayed in the education mode and the navigation data that need to be displayed in the standard mode are respectively set with a different navigation mark; or only need to be displayed in the standard mode. The navigation data displayed in the mode is set with a navigation mark, and the navigation data that needs to be displayed in the education mode is not set; or the navigation data that needs to be displayed in the education mode and the navigation data displayed in the standard mode are set to a different status data, as long as The scene mode of the navigation data can be distinguished, so that the standard mode and the education mode can display different navigation data.
在一些实施例中,首页数据中的导航数据包括了导航栏的控件数据和导航栏的排版数据,频道数据包括了频道栏的控件数据和频道栏的排版数据,栏目数据包括了每个推荐位的排版数据和可选择的媒资数据,例如,可选择的媒资数据为热度最高的媒资数据。运营人员编排好的首页数据可称为首页原始数据,运营人员将首页原始数据存储至融合DB中。In some embodiments, the navigation data in the homepage data includes the control data of the navigation bar and the layout data of the navigation bar, the channel data includes the control data of the channel bar and the layout data of the channel bar, and the column data includes each recommended position. Typesetting data and selectable media asset data. For example, the selectable media asset data is the most popular media asset data. The homepage data compiled by the operators can be called the homepage raw data, and the operators store the homepage raw data in the converged DB.
当用户通过JUUI APP输入进入首页的操作指令后,JUUI APP可向在线子系统获取首页数据。After the user enters the operation instruction to enter the homepage through the JUUI APP, the JUUI APP can obtain the homepage data from the online subsystem.
在线子系统可通过访问融合DB来调取首页原始数据,根据获得的首页原始数据,从内容子系统获取媒资数据。在一些实施例中,在线子系统根据推荐位可选择的媒资数据从内容子系统获取媒资数据。The online subsystem can retrieve the original data of the homepage by accessing the fusion DB, and obtain media asset data from the content subsystem according to the obtained original data of the homepage. In some embodiments, the online subsystem obtains media asset data from the content subsystem according to the media asset data selected by the recommended position.
在一些实施例中,在线子系统还向PDS系统获取机型版本能力数据,根据机型版本能力数据对来自内容子系统的媒资数据进行过滤,得到适应于显示设备的机型和JUUI APP版本的媒资数据,例如,根据不同领域热度最高的媒资数据包括电视剧A、综艺B和短视频C,根据JUUI APP版本,该推荐位对应的媒资类型为电视剧,则过滤综艺B和短视频C得到适应JUUI APP版本的媒资数据为电视剧A。In some embodiments, the online subsystem also obtains the model version capability data from the PDS system, and filters the media asset data from the content subsystem according to the model version capability data to obtain the model and JUUI APP version suitable for the display device For example, according to the most popular media asset data in different fields, including TV series A, variety show B, and short video C, according to the JUUI APP version, the media asset type corresponding to the recommended position is TV series, then variety B and short videos are filtered C gets the media asset data that adapts to the JUUI APP version as TV series A.
在一些实施例中,在线子系统将运营数据与过滤后的媒资数据进行合并,生成首页数据,将首页数据返回至JUUI APP,其中,运营数据包括首页原始数据。In some embodiments, the online subsystem merges the operation data with the filtered media asset data, generates homepage data, and returns the homepage data to the JUUI APP, where the operation data includes the original homepage data.
在一些实施例中,JUUI APP接收到首页数据后,从首页数据中筛选出符合当前场景模式的数据。例如,根据当前场景模式为标准模式,仅展示标准导航,即排除edubox_开头的导航数据,根据剩余的导航数据生成第一首页;根据当前场景模式为教育模式,仅展示教育导航,即保留edubox_开头的导航数据,排除其他导航数据,根据edubox_开头的导航数据生成第二首页。In some embodiments, after the JUUI APP receives the homepage data, it filters the homepage data to match the current scene mode. For example, according to the current scene mode as the standard mode, only the standard navigation is displayed, that is, the navigation data starting with edubox_ is excluded, and the first homepage is generated according to the remaining navigation data; according to the current scene mode as the education mode, only the education navigation is displayed, that is, edubox is reserved The navigation data starting with _ excludes other navigation data, and the second homepage is generated based on the navigation data starting with edubox_.
参见图7,为根据一些实施例的标准模式的首页示意图,如图7所示,该首页为第一首页,导航栏设置有多个操作控件,如:“我的”、“频道”、“影视”、“VIP”、“疫情”、“商城”、“游戏”、“应用”和“发现”,当用户触发导航栏的不同的操作控件后,可进入不同的导航页面。Refer to FIG. 7, which is a schematic diagram of the home page in the standard mode according to some embodiments. As shown in FIG. 7, the home page is the first home page, and the navigation bar is provided with multiple operation controls, such as: "my", "channel", " Movies, "VIP", "Pandemic", "Mall", "Games", "Apps" and "Discovery", when users trigger different operation controls on the navigation bar, they can enter different navigation pages.
在一些实施例中,导航栏上方可设置有模式切换控件,在标准模式下,该模式切换控件可显示为“教育模式”,以提示用户可将当前模式切换为教育模式,在教育模式下,该模式切换控件可显示为“标准模式”,以提示用户可将当前模式切换为标准模式。In some embodiments, a mode switching control may be provided above the navigation bar. In the standard mode, the mode switching control may be displayed as "education mode" to prompt the user to switch the current mode to the education mode. In the education mode, The mode switching control can be displayed as "standard mode" to prompt the user to switch the current mode to the standard mode.
在标准模式下,当用户触发模式切换控件后,显示设备可进入教育模式的首页,其中,用户触发模式切换控件的方式可包括利用遥控器选中模式切换控件,然后确认进入,当显示设备具备触控功能时,用户还可直接触控模式切换控件,当显示设备具备语音控制功能时,用户还可向显示设备发出语音指令来触发模式切换控件,当显示设备与智能终端如手机通信连接时,还可利用智能终端向显示设备发出模式切换指令。In the standard mode, when the user triggers the mode switch control, the display device can enter the homepage of the education mode. The user triggers the mode switch control to select the mode switch control with the remote control, and then confirm the entry. When the display device has a touch When the display device has a voice control function, the user can also send a voice command to the display device to trigger the mode switch control. When the display device communicates with a smart terminal such as a mobile phone, the user can directly touch the mode switch control. The smart terminal can also be used to issue a mode switching instruction to the display device.
在一些实施例中,当用户需要在标准模式下操控显示设备时,为避免用户误操作将标准模式切换为教育模式,显示设备还可被配置为首次进入教育模式时需要输入密码。当用户需要在教育模式下操控显示设备时,为给用户提供更精准的首页数据,还可在用户首次进入教育模式时显示年级选择页面,供用户输入年级。当用户不是首次进入教育模式,可直接展示之前所选年级的首页,具体可参见图8,为根据一些实施例的第二首页进入方法的流程示意图,如图8所示,该方法可包括如下步骤:In some embodiments, when the user needs to manipulate the display device in the standard mode, in order to prevent the user from switching the standard mode to the education mode by mistake, the display device may also be configured to require a password when entering the education mode for the first time. When the user needs to control the display device in the education mode, in order to provide the user with more accurate homepage data, the grade selection page can also be displayed when the user enters the education mode for the first time, for the user to enter the grade. When the user is not entering the education mode for the first time, he can directly display the home page of the previously selected grade. For details, see Figure 8, which is a schematic flow diagram of the second home page entry method according to some embodiments. As shown in Figure 8, the method may include the following step:
步骤S401E:判断用户是否是首次进入第二场景模式。Step S401E: Determine whether the user enters the second scene mode for the first time.
步骤S402E:如果用户是首次进入第二场景模式,控制所述显示器显示密码输入界面。Step S402E: If the user enters the second scene mode for the first time, control the display to display a password input interface.
步骤S403E:接收用户输入的密码信息。Step S403E: Receive the password information input by the user.
步骤S404E:根据用户输入的密码信息与预设密码信息一致,控制所述显示器显示多个年级选项控件。Step S404E: According to the password information input by the user consistent with the preset password information, control the display to display multiple grade option controls.
步骤S405E:接收用户输入的其中一个所述年级选项控件的操作指令。Step S405E: Receive an operation instruction of one of the grade option controls input by the user.
步骤S406E:如果用户不是首次进入第二场景模式,从所述第二模式数据中选取年级选项控件对应的首页数据。Step S406E: If the user is not entering the second scene mode for the first time, select the home page data corresponding to the grade option control from the second mode data.
步骤S407E:根据所述年级选项控件对应的首页数据控制所述显示器显示第二首页。Step S407E: Control the display to display a second home page according to the home page data corresponding to the grade option control.
在一些实施例中,可默认设置用户首次进入第二场景模式需要设置密码信息和年级信息,其中,用户设置完年级信息后,显示设备将年级信息存储到预设存储路径下,因此,当用户输入进入首页的操作指令后,显示设备可根据预设存储路径下的年级信息来判断用户是否是首次进入第二场景模式。如果预设存储路径下没有年级信息,则判定用户是首次进入第二场景模式,继续执行步骤S402E,如果预设存储路径下有年级信息,则判定用户不是首次进入第二场景模式,则可跳转至步骤S406E。In some embodiments, it can be set by default that the user needs to set password information and grade information when entering the second scene mode for the first time. After the user sets the grade information, the display device stores the grade information in a preset storage path. Therefore, when the user After inputting the operation instruction to enter the homepage, the display device can determine whether the user enters the second scene mode for the first time according to the grade information in the preset storage path. If there is no grade information in the preset storage path, it is determined that the user is entering the second scene mode for the first time, and step S402E is continued. If there is grade information in the preset storage path, it is determined that the user is not entering the second scene mode for the first time, and you can skip Go to step S406E.
步骤S402E:如果用户是首次进入第二场景模式,控制所述显示器显示密码输入界面。Step S402E: If the user enters the second scene mode for the first time, control the display to display a password input interface.
在一些实施例中,根据预设存储路径下有年级信息,判定用户是首次进入第二场景模式后,可显示密码输入界面,提示用户输入密码,在一些实施例中,该密码可为JUUI APP账号的密码,用户输入该密码,显示设备才能继续执行显示第二首页,可提高教育模式的隐私安全性。In some embodiments, after determining that the user enters the second scene mode for the first time based on the grade information in the preset storage path, the password input interface may be displayed to prompt the user to enter the password. In some embodiments, the password may be JUUI APP The password of the account, the user enters the password, the display device can continue to display the second homepage, which can improve the privacy security of the education mode.
步骤S403E:接收用户输入的密码信息。Step S403E: Receive the password information input by the user.
步骤S404E:根据用户输入的密码信息与预设密码信息一致,控制所述显示器显示多个年级选项控件。Step S404E: According to the password information input by the user consistent with the preset password information, control the display to display multiple grade option controls.
在一些实施例中,根据用户输入的密码与预设密码,如JUUI APP账号的密码一致,可控制显示器显示年级选择页面。In some embodiments, according to the password entered by the user and the preset password, for example, the password of the JUUI APP account is consistent, the display can be controlled to display the grade selection page.
参见图4,为根据一些实施例的年级选择页面的界面示意图。如图4所示,年级选择页面可选择多个年级选项控件,如“少儿”、“一年级”、“一年级”、“二年级”、“三年级”、“四年级”、“五年级”、“六年级”、“七年级”、“八年级”等等,用户可根据显示设备支持的控制方式,选中一个年级选项控件,例如,根据显示设备支持触控,点击“三年级”控件,生成对应该年级选项控件的操作指令,该操作指令为触控指令。Refer to FIG. 4, which is a schematic diagram of an interface of a grade selection page according to some embodiments. As shown in Figure 4, the grade selection page can select multiple grade option controls, such as "children", "first grade", "first grade", "second grade", "third grade", "fourth grade", and "fifth grade". "," "sixth grade", "seventh grade", "eighth grade" and so on, the user can select a grade option control according to the control mode supported by the display device, for example, according to the display device supports touch, click the "third grade" control , Generate an operation instruction corresponding to the grade option control, and the operation instruction is a touch instruction.
步骤S405E:接收用户输入的其中一个所述年级选项控件的操作指令。Step S405E: Receive an operation instruction of one of the grade option controls input by the user.
显示设备对用户的操作指令进行接收,例如,当用户的操作指令为触控指令时,年级选项控件的操作指令可为触控信号,显示设备的触控屏将年级选项控件的触控信号发送到显示设备的控制器,显示设备的控制器根据该触控信号对应的坐标区域,确定用户触控的年级选项控件。The display device receives the user's operation instruction. For example, when the user's operation instruction is a touch instruction, the operation instruction of the grade option control can be a touch signal, and the touch screen of the display device sends the touch signal of the grade option control To the controller of the display device, the controller of the display device determines the grade option control touched by the user according to the coordinate area corresponding to the touch signal.
步骤S406E:如果用户不是首次进入第二场景模式,从所述第二模式数据中选取年级选项控件对应的首页数据。Step S406E: If the user is not entering the second scene mode for the first time, select the home page data corresponding to the grade option control from the second mode data.
在一些实施例中,根据步骤S405E中用户选择的年级,可从第二模式数据中选取出该年级对应的导航数据。In some embodiments, according to the grade selected by the user in step S405E, the navigation data corresponding to the grade can be selected from the second mode data.
在一些实施例中,根据步骤S401E中判断出用户不是第一次进入教育模式,可直接从第二模式数据中选取出该年级对应的导航数据。In some embodiments, according to the judgment in step S401E that the user is not entering the education mode for the first time, the navigation data corresponding to the grade can be directly selected from the second mode data.
步骤S407E:根据所述年级选项控件对应的首页数据控制所述显示器显示第二首页。Step S407E: Control the display to display a second home page according to the home page data corresponding to the grade option control.
在一些实施例中,根据用户所选的年级,显示该年级下的第二首页。参见图5,为根据一些实施例的第二首页的界面示意图。In some embodiments, according to the grade selected by the user, the second homepage of the grade is displayed. Refer to FIG. 5, which is a schematic diagram of the interface of the second homepage according to some embodiments.
如图5所示,第二首页的导航栏可设置有一个操作控件,该操作控件可显示为用户所选年级,如“三年级”,用户可根据该操作控件重新选择年级。As shown in Figure 5, the navigation bar of the second homepage can be provided with an operation control, which can be displayed as the grade selected by the user, such as "third grade", and the user can reselect the grade according to the operation control.
第二首页的下方可设置有频道栏,频道栏可设置有多个操作控件,如“我的”、“同步课”、“直播课”、“绘本”、“学习”、“AR”和“应用”。用户根据这些操作控件进入不同的频道。A channel bar can be set at the bottom of the second homepage, and the channel bar can be set with multiple operation controls, such as "my", "synchronized lesson", "live lesson", "picture book", "learning", "AR" and " application". The user enters different channels according to these operation controls.
由上述实施例可见,本申请实施例的首页数据分为第一模式数据和第二模式数据,显示设备可直接获取全部的首页数据,根据首页的场景模式为第一场景模式,选择第一模式数据生成第一首页,根据首页的场景模式为第二场景模式,选择第二模式数据生成第二首页,从而使得服务器根据一套首页数据可生成两种首页,降低了首页生成和维护成本。It can be seen from the above embodiment that the home page data in the embodiment of this application is divided into the first mode data and the second mode data. The display device can directly obtain all the home page data. According to the scene mode of the home page as the first scene mode, select the first mode The data generates the first homepage, and selects the second mode data to generate the second homepage based on the scene mode of the homepage as the second scene mode, so that the server can generate two homepages based on a set of homepage data, reducing the cost of homepage generation and maintenance.
在一些实施例中,模式切换控件可以设置为隐藏控件,在用户输入预设操作后进行展示。In some embodiments, the mode switching control can be set as a hidden control, which is displayed after the user inputs a preset operation.
在一些实施例中,在不同场景下接收到两次返回键值后具有不同判断和处理逻辑。在用户首次连续两次即以上按返回键,在对应模式切换控件位置处展示切换提示,以提醒用户切换控件的位置,在该提示展出后,用户先取消提示,在选中切换控件进行模式的切换。这样可以加深用户的印象。In some embodiments, there are different judgment and processing logics after receiving two return key values in different scenarios. When the user presses the return key twice or more for the first time in a row, a switching prompt is displayed at the position of the corresponding mode switching control to remind the user to switch the position of the control. After the prompt is displayed, the user first cancels the prompt and selects the switching control to perform mode Switch. This can deepen the user's impression.
在一些实施例中,提示出现预设次数后,不再进行提示,因此展示提示前需要进行已展示次数的判断,如果达到了就不展示,反之则展示。In some embodiments, after the prompt appears a preset number of times, the prompt is no longer performed. Therefore, it is necessary to determine the number of impressions before the prompt is displayed. If the prompt is reached, it will not be displayed, otherwise, it will be displayed.
教育模式下的交互Interaction in Educational Mode
所述教育模式主页用于为用户提供基础的交互操作,例如,选择课程进行播放、执行设置程序、启动任一应用、切换操作模式等。为了支持上述交互操作,如图9所示,教育模式主页中可以包括多个显示区域,例如,位于显示主页顶部位置的Header区,位于显示主页中部位置的内容区,以及位于显示主页底部位置切换区(频道Tab)。The education mode homepage is used to provide users with basic interactive operations, such as selecting a course to play, executing a setting program, launching any application, switching operation modes, and so on. In order to support the above interactive operations, as shown in Figure 9, the education mode homepage can include multiple display areas, for example, the Header area at the top of the displayed homepage, the content area at the middle of the displayed homepage, and the switch at the bottom of the displayed homepage. District (channel Tab).
在一种示意性实施方式中,Header区用于显示功能性控件,例如,从左向右依次为“模式切换”、“语音”、“搜索”、“用户”、“年级”、“积分”、“wifi状态”、“时间”等。用户可以通过将焦点标志移动至任意一个功能性控件上,实现相对应的功能。In an exemplary embodiment, the Header area is used to display functional controls, for example, "mode switch", "voice", "search", "user", "grade", and "points" in order from left to right. , "Wifi status", "time", etc. The user can realize the corresponding function by moving the focus mark to any functional control.
在实际应用中,Header区所包含的功能性控件内容和数量可以通过服务器进行配置,以根据不同时间段的需要,调整Header区的显示布局。其中,“模式切换”控件可以用来切换显示设备的当前操作模式,当用户点击或者将焦点标志移动到“模式切换”控件上以后,直接从教育模式切换至标准模式。In practical applications, the content and number of functional controls contained in the header area can be configured by the server to adjust the display layout of the header area according to the needs of different time periods. Among them, the "mode switch" control can be used to switch the current operation mode of the display device. When the user clicks or moves the focus mark to the "mode switch" control, it will directly switch from the education mode to the standard mode.
“语音”控件可以用来调用显示设备内置的智能语音系统,当用户将焦点光标移动至“语音”控件上以后,可以启动显示设备内置的智能语音系统,并通过语音输入装置,如 麦克风等,输入语音信息,以进行语音搜索。显然,为了适应当前教育模式的需要,在教育模式主页中选择“语音”选项进行搜索时,搜索的内容可以仅限于少儿、教育相关的内容。The "Voice" control can be used to call the built-in intelligent voice system of the display device. When the user moves the focus cursor to the "Voice" control, the built-in intelligent voice system of the display device can be activated, and the voice input device, such as a microphone, can be used. Enter the voice message for voice search. Obviously, in order to meet the needs of the current education model, when you select the "voice" option in the education model homepage to search, the search content can be limited to children and education-related content.
“搜索”控件可以用于在用户点击后,跳转至搜索界面,同时接受用户输入的关键词文本信息,以启动搜索引擎,获得搜索结果。The "Search" control can be used to jump to the search interface after the user clicks it, and at the same time accept the keyword text information input by the user to start the search engine and obtain the search results.
“用户”控件可以对当前登录的账号信息进行展示。如果当前未登录账号,则显示为账号登录/注册入口,当用户点击该控件时,跳转至账号信息页面。如果当前已登录账号,则可以在登录后显示用户头像、昵称以及其他标识图案。显然,显示的用户昵称有字数限制,超出部分的字符可以用省略号代替。The "User" control can display the currently logged-in account information. If the account is not currently logged in, it will be displayed as the account login/registration portal. When the user clicks on this control, it will jump to the account information page. If the account is currently logged in, the user's avatar, nickname, and other identification patterns can be displayed after logging in. Obviously, the displayed user nickname has a limit on the number of characters, and the excess characters can be replaced with ellipsis.
“年级”控件可以直接对用户在年级选择界面选择的年级选项进行显示,例如,用户选择了“三年级”选项,则在“年级”控件位置直接显示“三年级”。如果用户在教育模式主页中点击“年级”控件,则可以跳转到年级选择界面;如果用户没有选择年级选项,则可以在“年级”控件位置显示“年级选择”,以引导用户跳转至年级选择界面。The "grade" control can directly display the grade options selected by the user on the grade selection interface. For example, if the user selects the "third grade" option, the "grade" control will directly display "third grade". If the user clicks on the "grade" control on the homepage of the education mode, they can jump to the grade selection interface; if the user does not select the grade option, they can display "grade selection" in the position of the "grade" control to guide the user to jump to the grade Select the interface.
“积分”控件用来显示当前登录账户拥有的积分值。显示过程中,可以包括积分标志图案和积分数量。其中,可根据系统特点,将积分指定为特定的名称,不同名称拥有不同的图案。例如当积分叫做“金豆”时,显示的图案可以为金色的豆子图形;显示的数值可以直接为当前登录账户拥有的积分数值。点击“积分”控件,可以跳转到积分界面,在积分界面中可以包括积分记录、充值、兑换等内容。The "Points" control is used to display the points value of the currently logged-in account. During the display process, the points logo pattern and the number of points can be included. Among them, according to the characteristics of the system, the points can be designated as a specific name, and different names have different patterns. For example, when the points are called "Golden Beans", the displayed pattern can be a golden bean graphic; the displayed value can be directly the value of the points owned by the currently logged-in account. Click the "Points" control to jump to the points interface, which can include points record, recharge, redemption, etc.
“wifi状态”控件可以通过多种网络状态标识来指定当前的网络连接状态。当用户点击“wifi状态”控件时,可以跳转至wifi设置界面,在wifi设置界面中可以包括可连接的网络列表,以及针对wifi进行切换、设置、连接的内容。The "wifi status" control can specify the current network connection status through a variety of network status identifiers. When the user clicks on the "wifi status" control, they can jump to the wifi setting interface. The wifi setting interface can include a list of connectable networks, as well as content for switching, setting, and connecting to wifi.
“时间”控件用来显示当前时间。可以根据当前页面布局情况自动调整显示时间形式。例如,可以将“wifi状态”控件和“时间”控件设置在页面的右上角进行显示,如果显示空间充分,可以将日期和时间均进行显示;如果显示空间不足,可以只显示时间,而当用户点击时,跳转至日历界面。显然,在部分实施例中,当用户点击时,还可以跳转至时间设置界面。The "Time" control is used to display the current time. The display time format can be automatically adjusted according to the current page layout. For example, you can set the "wifi status" control and the "time" control to display in the upper right corner of the page. If the display space is sufficient, you can display both the date and time; if the display space is insufficient, you can only display the time, and when the user When clicked, it jumps to the calendar interface. Obviously, in some embodiments, when the user clicks, it can also jump to the time setting interface.
还可以在Header区显示“VIP”控件。如果当前登录的账户已购买VIP,则可以显示VIP特殊标识、有效期和续费标签。其中,如果当前登录的账户购买了多个VIP,则显示的有效期可以为剩余时间最长的VIP有效期截止时间。相应地,在用户点击“VIP”控件时,可以跳转至续费页面。如果当前登录的账户未购买VIP,则可以显示购买引导的活动文案,例如“限时8折优惠”等。在“VIP”控件位置所显示的文本,可以对框内文本字数进行限制,超出部分以滚动(跑马灯)形式显示。You can also display the "VIP" control in the Header area. If the currently logged-in account has purchased a VIP, the VIP special logo, validity period and renewal label can be displayed. Among them, if the currently logged-in account has purchased multiple VIPs, the displayed validity period may be the VIP validity period expiration time with the longest remaining time. Correspondingly, when the user clicks on the "VIP" control, they can jump to the renewal page. If the currently logged-in account does not purchase a VIP, you can display the activity copy of the purchase guide, such as "Limited Time 20% Off" and so on. The text displayed in the position of the "VIP" control can limit the number of words in the text box, and the excess part is displayed in the form of scrolling (horse racing lights).
内容区作为显示主页的主要显示区,可以用来呈现教育相关的资源图案和文字,以便用户在内容区中选定任一资源进行播放。内容区可以由主页海报拼接预设布局的多种模板,每个模块上可以进一步显示为不同功能的卡片控件。例如,包括:“课程详情页”、“专题”、“分类”、“单集”、“VIP购买”、“学习记录”等。用户通过点击各卡片控件,指示显示设 备启用相应的功能。如,用户点击“课程详情页”后,显示设备可以对课程的详情信息进行显示,同时显示播放控件,从而实现对相应课程资源进行播放。As the main display area for displaying the homepage, the content area can be used to present education-related resource patterns and text so that the user can select any resource in the content area to play. The content area can be spliced with a variety of templates with preset layouts from homepage posters, and each module can be further displayed as card controls with different functions. For example, include: "course details page", "topic", "category", "single episode", "VIP purchase", "learning record", etc. The user instructs the display device to enable the corresponding function by clicking each card control. For example, after the user clicks the "Course Details Page", the display device can display the detailed information of the course and display the playback controls at the same time, so as to realize the playback of the corresponding course resources.
切换区内可以通过设置多个标签,以切换不同的显示页面。例如,切换区的每一个标签代表一个频道首页,用户可以通过将焦点标志设置在不同的标签上,从而使内容区显示不同的频道首页。如图9所示,在切换区中依次显示:“我的”、“同步课”、“直播课”、“绘本”、“学习”、“AR”、“应用”等频道。可以通过服务器配置频道首页的数量、图标、名称、顺序。还可以根据不同的使用场景指定哪个频道首页为默认主页。Multiple labels can be set in the switching area to switch between different display pages. For example, each label in the switching area represents a channel homepage, and the user can set the focus mark on different labels to display different channel homepages in the content area. As shown in Figure 9, in the switching area, the following channels are displayed in sequence: "My", "Synchronized Lesson", "Live Lesson", "Picture Book", "Learning", "AR", "Application" and other channels. The number, icon, name, and order of the channel homepage can be configured through the server. You can also specify which channel homepage is the default homepage according to different usage scenarios.
切换区中标签指代的频道可以进一步分为分年龄频道和通用频道。例如,“我的”、“学习”、“AR”、“应用”属于通用频道;“同步课”、“直播课”、“绘本”、“音频”属于分年龄频道。显然,部分频道可以属于多个年级公用。The channels referred to by tags in the switching area can be further divided into age-specific channels and general channels. For example, "My", "Learning", "AR", and "Apps" belong to general channels; "Synchronized Course", "Live Course", "Picture Book", and "Audio" belong to age-specific channels. Obviously, some channels can be shared by multiple grades.
由于切换区中的控件常用于切换频道首页,因此切换区中应控制控件的数量在一个屏幕页面之内显示,相应的可以根据显示设备的显示区域大小和分辨率给出标签限定数量以及每个标签的字数限制。Since the controls in the switching area are often used to switch the channel homepage, the number of controls in the switching area should be displayed within one screen page. Accordingly, the limited number of labels and each label can be given according to the display area size and resolution of the display device. The word limit of the label.
当用户在切换区切换至“我的”频道时,内容区的显示内容可以变更为“我的”频道对应的频道主页。在“我的”频道对应的频道主页中,可以包括多个功能卡片。例如,如图10所示,功能卡片可以包括:“账户基本信息”、“教育模式管理入口”、“教育学习报告”、“用户的消费记录”、“收藏入口”、“VIP购买入口”、“手机端app/微信公众等引流入口”以及其他附加功能。When the user switches to the "My" channel in the switching area, the content displayed in the content area can be changed to the channel homepage corresponding to the "My" channel. The channel homepage corresponding to the "My" channel can include multiple function cards. For example, as shown in Figure 10, the function card may include: "Basic Account Information", "Education Mode Management Entry", "Education Study Report", "User Consumption Record", "Collection Entry", "VIP Purchase Entry", "Mobile app/WeChat public and other drainage portals" and other additional functions.
多个功能卡片可以通过阵列的方式拼接形成整个内容区。还可以根据不同功能卡片对应使用频率的不同,调整各功能卡片的大小和设置位置。例如,账户基本信息、教育模式管理入口和教育学习报告的使用频率较高,因此可以加大功能卡片的显示面积,如在内容区上部区域显示这三个功能卡片;而其他附加信息的使用频率很低,因此可以减小对应功能卡片的显示面积,仅在内容区的底部一行进行显示即可。Multiple function cards can be spliced in an array to form the entire content area. The size and setting position of each function card can also be adjusted according to the corresponding frequency of use of different function cards. For example, basic account information, education mode management entrance and education learning reports are used frequently, so the display area of function cards can be increased, such as displaying these three function cards in the upper area of the content area; and the frequency of use of other additional information It is very low, so it can reduce the display area of the corresponding function card, and only display it in the bottom row of the content area.
不同的功能卡片在点击后,可以跳转至不同的界面。例如,点击账户基本信息卡片,则跳转至相应账户基本信息页面。点击教育模式管理入口对应功能卡片可以对教育模式进行设定,如设置观看时长等。After clicking on different function cards, you can jump to different interfaces. For example, click on the basic account information card to jump to the corresponding basic account information page. Click on the function card corresponding to the education mode management entry to set the education mode, such as setting the viewing time.
需要说明的是,在教育模式下,点击功能卡片时所呈现的内容应与教育相关。例如在点击用户的消费记录功能卡片时,可以显示用户的消费记录信息,但所显示的内容中需要过滤少儿、教育、在线学习以外的其他消费记录。同理,在点击收藏入口功能卡片以后,所显示的收藏界面也仅包括少儿影视、教育资源、在线学习等内容,而对于标准模式下收藏的内容不进行显示。It should be noted that in the education mode, the content presented when clicking the function card should be related to education. For example, when clicking the user's consumption record function card, the user's consumption record information can be displayed, but the displayed content needs to filter other consumption records other than children, education, and online learning. In the same way, after clicking the collection entry function card, the displayed collection interface only includes children's movies, educational resources, online learning, etc., and the collection content in the standard mode is not displayed.
手机端app/微信公众等引流入口,可以显示运营商提供的二维码图案,当用户通过手机等移动终端扫描该二维码时,可以跳转至指定的app下载页面或者关注页面。还可以根据不同的应用环境调整二维码指定的功能。The mobile phone app/WeChat public and other drainage portals can display the QR code pattern provided by the operator. When the user scans the QR code through a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone, the user can jump to the designated app download page or follow page. The functions specified by the QR code can also be adjusted according to different application environments.
另外,附加功能对应的卡片可用于在点击后,显示一些附加信息或调用其他功能,如“点卡兑换”、“客服电话”、“版本信息”、“本机信息”等。其中,点击“点卡兑换”功能 卡片则跳转到点卡兑换界面;点击“客服电话”可以显示操作系统客服或者显示设备整机客服信息;点击“版本信息”则显示当前操作系统的版本信息,并且在有新版本时,显示更新提示,没有新版本时显示“已为最新版本”及相应的版本号即可;点击“本机信息”,可以显示本机名称、软件版号等信息。In addition, the card corresponding to the additional function can be used to display some additional information or call other functions after clicking, such as "point card exchange", "customer service phone", "version information", "local information" and so on. Among them, click the "Point Card Exchange" function card to jump to the point card exchange interface; click "Customer Service Phone" to display the customer service information of the operating system or display the customer service information of the device; click "Version Information" to display the version information of the current operating system , And when there is a new version, the update prompt will be displayed. When there is no new version, it will display "the latest version" and the corresponding version number; click "this machine information" to display the machine name, software version number and other information.
“学习”频道作为教育模式下的一个重要频道,可以同样在选定后,在内容区显示包含多个功能卡片的画面。进一步地,如图11所示,可以对内容区显示的画面进行进一步划分,例如包括“学习记录”、“已购课程”两个区域。其中,“学习记录”区域可用于显示多个课程资源的播放记录和观看过的在线直播课程的记录。显然,对于课程资源的播放记录,可以在点击后,继续上一次观看的时刻进行播放;而对于在线直播课程可以在点击后,直接跳转至对应直播间画面即可。“已购课程”区域用于显示当前账户所购买的各种课程链接,如直播课程、VIP课程分类入口等。对于已购买的VIP课程,可以在对应的卡片上显示课程/VIP名称以及有效期等信息。As an important channel in the education mode, the "learning" channel can also be selected to display a screen containing multiple function cards in the content area. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the screen displayed in the content area can be further divided, for example, including two areas of "learning records" and "purchased courses". Among them, the "learning records" area can be used to display the playback records of multiple course resources and the records of watched online live courses. Obviously, for the playback record of the course resource, you can continue to play it at the last time you watched it after you click it; and for the online live course, you can jump directly to the corresponding live room screen after you click it. The "Purchased Courses" area is used to display links to various courses purchased by the current account, such as live courses, VIP course classification entrances, etc. For the purchased VIP courses, information such as the course/VIP name and validity period can be displayed on the corresponding card.
在订阅列表中进行课程的推荐Recommend courses in the subscription list
在实际显示过程中,每个区域可以包括多个显示位,以显示多个功能卡片。同一区域内的显示位应包括至少一排,当不足一排时,可以使用推荐课程卡片进行补足。例如,如图12所示,当“学习记录”不足一排时,可以显示课程记录后,通过大数据确定剩余显示位数量相同的推荐课程卡片,以将剩余显示位进行补足。In the actual display process, each area can include multiple display positions to display multiple function cards. The display position in the same area should include at least one row. When there is less than one row, the recommended course card can be used to make up. For example, as shown in Fig. 12, when the "learning records" is less than one row, after displaying the course records, the recommended course cards with the same number of remaining display positions can be determined through big data to supplement the remaining display positions.
同理,当“已购课程”不足一排时,可以在显示已购课程或VIP课程后,通过大数据确定剩余显示位数量相同的推荐课程卡片,以将剩余显示位进行补足。显然,为了便于用户分辨学习记录(或已购课程),与推荐课程,可以在推荐课程卡片上添加包含“推荐”、“广告”等文字的标签。Similarly, when the "purchased courses" is less than one row, after displaying the purchased courses or VIP courses, the recommended course cards with the same number of remaining display positions can be determined through big data to supplement the remaining display positions. Obviously, in order to facilitate the user to distinguish learning records (or purchased courses) and recommended courses, tags containing words such as "recommendation" and "advertisement" can be added to the recommended course card.
在一种示意性实现方式中,还可以根据每个区域中待显示内容的情况,调整区域的指示文字。例如,如图13所示,在没有学习记录,可以将学习记录的标题更改为“暂无学习记录,为你推荐”,同时在“学习记录”区域的每个显示位均显示推荐课程卡片。同理,如图14所示,在没有已购课程时,可以将已购课程的标题更改为“暂未购买课程,猜你喜欢”,同时在“已购课程”区域的每个显示位上显示推荐课程卡片,也可以使用VIP购买卡片替换任一推荐课程卡片。In an exemplary implementation manner, the indication text of the area can also be adjusted according to the content to be displayed in each area. For example, as shown in Figure 13, if there is no learning record, the title of the learning record can be changed to "No learning record, recommended for you", and at the same time, a recommended course card is displayed in each display position of the "Learning record" area. Similarly, as shown in Figure 14, when there is no purchased course, you can change the title of the purchased course to "Not yet purchased course, guess you like it", and at the same time on each display position in the "Purchased course" area Show recommended course card, you can also use VIP purchase card to replace any recommended course card.
已下线媒资的管理Management of offline media assets
在一些实施例中,用户电视终端首页数据是运营在后台编排的,面向终端查询数据库获取到编排数据后,需要调用内容系统接口获取媒资详情,包括媒资海报,名称,同时通过入参(filterOffline=true)告诉内容系统,需要将上下线状态online为下线的过滤掉,此时内容系统只会返回online为上线状态的媒资,之后面向终端将内容返回的数据进行封装下发。In some embodiments, the homepage data of the user TV terminal is arranged in the background. After querying the database for the terminal to obtain the arrangement data, it is necessary to call the content system interface to obtain the media asset details, including the media asset poster, name, and enter the parameters ( filterOffline=true) tells the content system that it needs to filter out the online status of online as offline. At this time, the content system will only return the media assets that are online, and then encapsulate and distribute the data returned by the content to the terminal.
用户已购页面数据,面向终端首先调用会员接口获取当前登录用户已经购买的所有课程,然后同样调用内容接口获取媒资详情,但此时调用内容系统入参(filterOffline=false)告诉内容系统不过滤online为下线的媒资。该页面获取数据除了获取媒资基本信息外,还需 要内容系统返回运营上下线状态available,第三方上下线状态status,售罄状态shelves,课程上下线状态online。此时如果用户购买的某个课程已经售罄(shelves=0),则课程上下线状态在内容系统即为下线状态(online=0),但由于我们入参filterOffline=false,所以内容系统还是会返回该课程的详情信息。面向终端在下发课程时会分别判断运营上下线状态available=1,第三方上下线状态status=1的媒资,即如果已经售罄shelves=0也会进行下发。The user has purchased the page data, and the terminal-oriented first calls the membership interface to obtain all the courses that the currently logged-in user has purchased, and then also calls the content interface to obtain media information details, but at this time calls the content system input parameter (filterOffline=false) to tell the content system not to filter Online is offline media assets. In addition to obtaining the basic information of media assets, the data obtained on this page also requires the content system to return the operational online and offline status available, the third-party online and offline status status, the sold-out status shelves, and the course online and offline status online. At this time, if a certain course purchased by the user has been sold out (shelves=0), the online status of the course in the content system is the offline status (online=0), but because we entered the parameter filterOffline=false, the content system is still Details of the course will be returned. When delivering courses to the terminal, it will judge the media assets with the operational online status available = 1, and the third-party online status status = 1, that is, if they have sold out shelves = 0, they will also be delivered.
本申请实施例中,显示设备200发送的用于显示带有媒资数据界面的请求叫做媒资请求,而服务器400根据媒资请求反馈的数据叫做下发数据。显示设备200可以根据收到的数据调整显示界面上的具体内容,以呈现不同的媒资界面效果。例如,在用户通过交互操作进入控制主页时,显示设备200中的操作系统可以提供基础UI显示架构,再通过向服务器400发送媒资请求,获得下发数据,再将下发数据中的内容添加至基础UI显示架构之中,从而形成完整的控制主页。In the embodiment of the present application, the request sent by the display device 200 for displaying the interface with the media asset data is called the media asset request, and the data fed back by the server 400 according to the media asset request is called the issued data. The display device 200 can adjust the specific content on the display interface according to the received data to present different media asset interface effects. For example, when the user enters the control homepage through interactive operations, the operating system in the display device 200 can provide a basic UI display architecture, and then send a media asset request to the server 400 to obtain the distributed data, and then add the content in the distributed data Into the basic UI display structure to form a complete control homepage.
下发数据通常可以在被显示设备200解析后,组成显示控制主页的内容区,例如在控制主页的内容区中显示具体媒资的海报(图案)、链接、简介信息等。相应的,下发数据中可以携带有相应的媒资基本信息和详情信息。The distributed data can usually be parsed by the display device 200 to form a content area for displaying the control homepage, for example, a poster (pattern), link, profile information, etc. of specific media assets are displayed in the content area of the control homepage. Correspondingly, the issued data can carry corresponding basic media information and detailed information.
对于显示设备200所呈现的具体界面中,需要利用下发数据才能完成显示的界面有多种,例如,主页界面、活动界面、已购界面等。其中,主页界面和活动界面中所展示的媒资一般可以由服务器400根据当前运营状态进行统一下发,以便显示设备200在对应的界面上完成显示。而已购界面中展示的媒资通常是用户已购买或者已播放过的媒资,与用户信息之间具有关联关系。For the specific interface presented by the display device 200, there are various interfaces that need to use the issued data to complete the display, for example, a homepage interface, an activity interface, a purchased interface, and so on. Among them, the media assets displayed in the homepage interface and the activity interface can generally be uniformly issued by the server 400 according to the current operating status, so that the display device 200 can complete the display on the corresponding interface. The media assets displayed in the purchased interface are usually media assets that have been purchased or played by the user, and have an association relationship with user information.
所述媒资由服务器400提供也可以由服务器400访问第三方数据库提供。媒资一般包括能够在显示设备200上播放的各种视频、音频、图文资源,以及通过网络直播平台而实时形成的视频流、音频流、数据流等。不同的媒资可以设置有不同的播放权限,例如,部分媒资可以是需要额外购买的媒资,如VIP资源、付费直播等。这些需要额外购买的媒资会随着运营活动的进行,设置一定的折扣活动。例如,在特定时间段设置降价活动等。具有折扣活动的媒资可以通过主页界面、活动界面等访问频率较高的界面进行显示,以便推荐给用户,及时获知相关活动信息。The media information is provided by the server 400 or may be provided by the server 400 accessing a third-party database. Media assets generally include various video, audio, and graphic resources that can be played on the display device 200, as well as video streams, audio streams, data streams, etc. formed in real time through a web live broadcast platform. Different media assets can be set with different playback permissions. For example, some media assets may be media assets that need to be purchased additionally, such as VIP resources, paid live broadcasts, and so on. These media assets that need to be purchased additionally will be set up with certain discount activities as the operation activities proceed. For example, set a price reduction campaign in a specific time period, etc. Media assets with discount activities can be displayed through the homepage interface, event interface, and other frequently accessed interfaces, so that they can be recommended to users and get relevant event information in time.
运营活动中还可以设置活动有效期,当活动结束后运营服务器会将对应的媒资做售罄下架处理。例如,对于直播课程的活动界面可以显示为如图15所示的界面。在课程详情界面中,可以显示对应直播课程的详情信息,包括课程名、主讲人信息、课时信息、直播时间等,还可以包括具体的活动信息,包括原价、现价、起止时间等。The validity period of the activity can also be set in the operation activity. When the activity ends, the operation server will sell the corresponding media assets and remove them from the shelves. For example, the activity interface for a live course may be displayed as the interface shown in FIG. 15. In the course details interface, the detailed information of the corresponding live course can be displayed, including the course name, lecturer information, class time information, live broadcast time, etc., and can also include specific event information, including original price, current price, start and end time, etc.
如果用户购买了对应媒资,则可以在活动界面或者主页界面中调整对应的显示内容,以标志该课程已经被购买。如图16所示,可以将活动界面中的部分信息替换为与课程相关的播放信息,包括观看进度、互动次数等。If the user purchases the corresponding media assets, the corresponding display content can be adjusted in the event interface or the homepage interface to mark that the course has been purchased. As shown in Figure 16, part of the information in the activity interface can be replaced with course-related playback information, including viewing progress, number of interactions, and so on.
对于已购买的媒资,还可以在已购界面进行显示。如图17所示,在已购界面中,可以显示当前用户信息下已购买的全部课程信息,并可以通过不同的标签来标识其课程状态,如“已购”、“已过期”等。The purchased media assets can also be displayed on the purchased interface. As shown in Figure 17, in the purchased interface, all the course information that has been purchased under the current user information can be displayed, and the course status can be identified through different tags, such as "purchased", "expired", etc.
基于上述界面显示方式,当活动结束后运营服务器会将课程做售罄下架处理,这时服务器400在给显示设备200下发数据时,会将这类课程进行过滤,以便在主页界面、活动界面等界面中不再用户进行显示。但针对活动期间已经购买的用户,仍然需要在已购界面展示相关课程以供播放,因此服务器400仍旧需要向已购用户下发这些售罄下架的课程,因此对于不同的显示界面,需要一种机制来保证售罄下架的课程在不同场景界面下是否展示给用户。Based on the above interface display method, when the event is over, the operation server will process the courses sold out. At this time, when the server 400 sends data to the display device 200, it will filter such courses so that they can be displayed on the home page interface and the event. The user interface is no longer displayed in the interface. However, for users who have already purchased during the event, they still need to display relevant courses on the purchased interface for playback. Therefore, the server 400 still needs to distribute these sold-out courses to the purchased users. Therefore, for different display interfaces, a different display interface is required. A mechanism to ensure that the courses sold out are shown to users in different scene interfaces.
为了能够实现上述显示机制,本申请的部分实施例中提供一种媒资数据下发方法,如图18所示,本申请提供的媒资数据下发方法,包括以下步骤:In order to realize the above-mentioned display mechanism, some embodiments of this application provide a method for distributing media asset data. As shown in FIG. 18, the method for distributing media asset data provided by this application includes the following steps:
S1B:获取媒资请求。S1B: Request to obtain media assets.
所述媒资请求是由显示设备200发送给服务器400的一种请求,用于在显示设备200的显示器275上展示任一包含媒资内容的界面。媒资请求可以由显示设备200根据用户的交互操作动作自动生成,并发送给服务器400。例如,用户开机进入控制主页的过程中,由于控制主页上需要显示媒资内容,因此在显示控制主页前,显示设备200可以自动向服务器400发送媒资请求。The media asset request is a request sent by the display device 200 to the server 400 for displaying any interface containing media asset content on the display 275 of the display device 200. The media resource request may be automatically generated by the display device 200 according to the user's interactive operation action, and sent to the server 400. For example, in the process of the user powering on and entering the control homepage, since the content of the media asset needs to be displayed on the control homepage, the display device 200 may automatically send a media asset request to the server 400 before the control homepage is displayed.
为了使所显示画面中包含的内容具有多样性,以更加符合不同用户的观看需要,所述媒资请求中可以包括用户信息以及显示界面类型。其中,用户信息作为不同用户的身份区别信息,可以是当前操作系统中登录的用户账号,也可以根据不同的操作模式选择不同的用户信息。例如,在具有教育模式的显示设备200中,用户在选择进入教育模式后,可以根据预先设定的选项,选择出不同的年龄、年级、主要学习内容等信息的组合,从而生成包含对应组合的用户信息发送给服务器400。In order to make the content contained in the displayed screen diversified to better meet the viewing needs of different users, the media asset request may include user information and display interface types. Among them, the user information, as the identification information of different users, can be a user account logged in the current operating system, or different user information can be selected according to different operation modes. For example, in the display device 200 with an education mode, after the user chooses to enter the education mode, he can select different combinations of information such as age, grade, and main learning content according to preset options, so as to generate a corresponding combination of information. The user information is sent to the server 400.
对于未登录用户信息的情况,显示设备200的操作系统可以自动跳转至登录界面以供用户完成登录,并在用户完成登录后,根据登录的用户账号自动生成媒资请求。显示设备200也可以根据媒资播放过程的统计数据,确定一个通用的媒资推荐信息作为用户信息,从而在未登录用户信息时可以使用通用的媒资推荐信息生成媒资请求。In the case of user information not logged in, the operating system of the display device 200 can automatically jump to the login interface for the user to complete the login, and after the user completes the login, the media asset request is automatically generated according to the logged-in user account. The display device 200 can also determine a general media asset recommendation information as user information according to the statistical data of the media asset playing process, so that the general media asset recommendation information can be used to generate a media asset request when the user information is not logged in.
所述显示界面类型用于指示用户在显示设备200上所要显示的是那种界面。本申请实施例中,所述显示界面类型为第一类界面或第二类界面中的一种。其中,第一类界面是指如首页界面、活动界面等不需要对下架媒资进行显示的界面。通常第一类界面中显示的媒资与服务器400的运营活动相关,其媒资内容更新的频率较快,因此对于已经下架的媒资不必再进行显示,而将更多的显示空间留给其他媒资内容。The display interface type is used to indicate what kind of interface the user wants to display on the display device 200. In the embodiment of the present application, the display interface type is one of the first type of interface or the second type of interface. Among them, the first type of interface refers to interfaces that do not need to display media assets that are removed from the shelves, such as the home page interface and the activity interface. Generally, the media assets displayed in the first type of interface are related to the operation activities of the server 400, and the media assets content is updated more frequently. Therefore, the media assets that have been removed do not need to be displayed, and more display space is reserved. Other media content.
第二类界面是指如已购界面等需要对用户信息下所有媒资进行长时间显示的界面。通常第二类界面中显示的媒资与用户信息相关,其内容通常随着用户的购买行为而进行更新,因此对于已经下架但被用户购买的媒资内容,仍旧需要进行显示,直至媒资彻底失效或者用户手动对媒资内容进行了删除。在一些实施例中,第二类界面还可以包括观看历史界面,使用历史界面等对用户信息下所有媒资进行长时间显示的界面中的至少一个。The second type of interface refers to an interface that needs to display all media assets under user information for a long time, such as a purchased interface. Generally, the media assets displayed in the second type of interface are related to user information, and their content is usually updated with the user’s purchase behavior. Therefore, media assets that have been removed from the shelves but purchased by users still need to be displayed until the media assets It is completely invalid or the user manually deletes the content of the media asset. In some embodiments, the second type of interface may also include at least one of a viewing history interface, a history interface and other interfaces that display all media assets under user information for a long time.
在一些实施例中,用户通过输入指令控制界面的显示或切换,显示设备根据要显示的界面的标识相服务器发送媒资请求,在一些实施例中,媒资请求中包括用户信息和界面标 识。In some embodiments, the user controls the display or switching of the interface by inputting instructions, and the display device sends a media asset request according to the identity of the interface to be displayed. In some embodiments, the media asset request includes user information and an interface identifier.
在一些实施例中,在接收到服务器下发的下发数据之前,显示设备显示对应的界面,并根据存储的历史数据或预设数据加载所述界面,在接收到下发数据后更新所述界面和存储的历史数据。In some embodiments, before receiving the issued data issued by the server, the display device displays the corresponding interface, and loads the interface according to the stored historical data or preset data, and updates the interface after receiving the issued data. Interface and stored historical data.
S2B:响应于所述媒资请求,根据所述用户信息提取下发数据。S2B: In response to the media asset request, extract and deliver data according to the user information.
服务器400在接收到显示设备200发送的媒资请求后,可以提取出媒资请求中携带的用户信息,并通过用户信息数据库查询用户信息下的媒资数据,从而形成下发数据。所述下发数据中可以包括所述用户信息下的全部媒资,即包括用户已购,但已经处于下架状态的媒资。After the server 400 receives the media asset request sent by the display device 200, it can extract the user information carried in the media asset request, and query the media asset data under the user information through the user information database to form distributed data. The delivered data may include all media assets under the user information, that is, media assets that have been purchased by the user but are already in the off-shelf state.
例如,服务器400通过对接收到的媒资请求进行读取,确定当前用户信息中包括用户设定的学习年级为三年级,则根据用户信息,可以提取“三年级”对应的媒资内容。同时,如果用户信息下已购买“国学经典”的限时优惠课程,但此课程已经过了优惠期,处于售罄状态,则还服务器400还需要将“国学经典”这一课程媒资也进行提取,进而获得下发数据。For example, the server 400 determines that the current user information includes the learning grade set by the user as the third grade by reading the received media asset request, and can extract the media asset content corresponding to the "third grade" based on the user information. At the same time, if the limited-time discount course of "Classics of Chinese Studies" has been purchased under the user information, but the course has passed the discount period and is in a sold-out state, the server 400 also needs to extract the media resources of the course "Classics of Chinese Studies" , And then get the issued data.
在将下发数据发送给显示设备200之前,还可以对下发数据进行筛选,以根据不同的显示界面类型发送不同内容的下发数据。Before sending the distributed data to the display device 200, the distributed data may also be filtered, so as to send distributed data of different contents according to different display interface types.
S3B:如果所述显示界面类型为所述第一类界面,删除所述下发数据中的所述下架媒资。S3B: If the display interface type is the first type interface, delete the off-shelf media asset in the delivered data.
通过读取媒资请求中的显示界面类型,当获得当前用户在显示设备200上所要显示是界面为主页界面或活动界面等第一类界面时,服务器400可以将下发数据中的下架媒资进行删除,从而无需在显示界面中显示下架媒资。By reading the display interface type in the media asset request, when it is obtained that the interface that the current user wants to display on the display device 200 is the first type of interface such as the homepage interface or the active interface, the server 400 can remove the media in the issued data. Delete the media assets so that the media assets do not need to be displayed in the display interface.
例如,服务器400通过对接收到的媒资请求进行读取,确定当前用户发送的媒资请求中指定的显示界面类型为显示控制主页。由于在控制主页上不需要对已经下架的媒资进行显示,因此服务器400可以将已经下架但用户已购买的“国学经典”课程媒资进行删除,仅向显示设备200发送“三年级”对应的媒资内容。For example, the server 400 reads the received media asset request and determines that the display interface type specified in the media asset request sent by the current user is the display control homepage. Since there is no need to display media assets that have been removed from the shelves on the control homepage, the server 400 can delete the media assets of the "Classic of Chinese Studies" course that has been removed but the user has purchased, and only sends "third grade" to the display device 200. Corresponding media content.
需要说明的是,本实施例中所述的删除并非将媒资数据全部删除,而是在显示界面类型为第一类界面时,不向显示设备200发送下架媒资,从而减少向显示设备200发送的数据量。进一步地,服务器400向显示设备200发送的下发数据,是指能够在某些界面中进行展示的基础信息和详情信息,并非媒资文件或视频流数据本身。对于媒资文件或视频流数据,只有当用户在对应界面中选择播放以后,才将媒资文件或视频流数据发送给显示设备200。It should be noted that the deletion described in this embodiment does not delete all the media asset data, but when the display interface type is the first type of interface, the media asset is not sent to the display device 200 to be removed, thereby reducing the number of media assets that are sent to the display device. 200 The amount of data sent. Further, the distributed data sent by the server 400 to the display device 200 refers to basic information and detailed information that can be displayed in certain interfaces, and is not the media asset file or the video stream data itself. For the media asset file or video stream data, only after the user selects to play in the corresponding interface, the media asset file or video stream data is sent to the display device 200.
S4B:如果所述显示界面类型为所述第二类界面,保留所述下发数据中的所述下架媒资。S4B: If the display interface type is the second type interface, reserve the off-shelf media assets in the issued data.
通过读取媒资请求中的显示界面类型,当获得当前用户在显示设备200上所要显示是界面为已购界面等第二类界面时,服务器400可以直接将下发数据发送给显示设备200,保留下发数据中的下架媒资,以在已购界面中显示下架媒资,供用户点击播放。By reading the display interface type in the media asset request, when it is obtained that the interface that the current user wants to display on the display device 200 is a purchased interface, the server 400 can directly send the issued data to the display device 200, The off-shelf media assets in the distributed data are retained to display the off-shelf media assets in the purchased interface for users to click to play.
由以上方案可知,上述实施例中提供的媒资数据下发方法可以在获取媒资请求以后,响应于该媒资请求,提取下发数据。其中下发数据中包括媒资获取请求对应显示设备的用户信息下已购的下架媒资。再根据媒资请求中的显示界面类型对下发数据进行过滤,即如果显示界面类型为第一类界面,删除下发数据中的下架媒资,如果显示界面类型为第二类界面,保留下发数据中的下架媒资,以将下架媒资下发至显示设备200。所述方法可以针对媒资请求中不同的显示界面,下发不同的媒资数据,从而实现在已购界面和其他界面显示不同的内容。It can be seen from the above solution that the media asset data distribution method provided in the foregoing embodiment may extract and distribute data in response to the media asset request after obtaining the media asset request. The issued data includes the media assets purchased under the user information of the display device corresponding to the media asset acquisition request. Then filter the issued data according to the display interface type in the media asset request, that is, if the display interface type is the first type interface, delete the off-shelf media asset in the issued data, if the display interface type is the second type interface, keep it The off-shelf media assets in the data are issued to deliver the off-shelf media assets to the display device 200. The method can issue different media asset data for different display interfaces in the media asset request, so that different content can be displayed on the purchased interface and other interfaces.
对于服务器400,其所下发的媒资数据可以来源于服务器400的数据库或者第三方数据库。作为媒资信号源,服务器400所能够下发的媒资数量和种类众多,而为了及时获知所提取的媒资情况,在本申请的部分实施例中,如图19所示,根据所述用户信息提取下发数据的步骤,包括:For the server 400, the distributed media asset data may come from the database of the server 400 or a third-party database. As a media asset signal source, the number and types of media assets that can be issued by the server 400 are numerous. In order to know the extracted media assets in time, in some embodiments of the application, as shown in FIG. 19, according to the user The steps of information extraction and data distribution include:
S201B:从所述媒资请求中提取用户信息;S201B: Extract user information from the media asset request;
S202B:根据所述用户信息抓取所述用户信息下的全部待显示媒资数据,生成所述下发数据;S202B: Grab all to-be-displayed media asset data under the user information according to the user information, and generate the issued data;
S203B:遍历所述下发数据中的每个待显示媒资的上下线状态;S203B: Traverse the online and offline status of each media asset to be displayed in the issued data;
S204B:如果所述待显示媒资的上下线状态为下线状态,标记对应待显示媒资为下架媒资。S204B: If the online status of the media asset to be displayed is an offline status, mark the media asset corresponding to the media asset to be displayed as offline media asset.
本实施例中,当服务器400获得显示设备200发送的媒资请求后,可以从媒资请求中提取用户信息,再根据用户信息从数据库中匹配媒资数据,从而抓取用户信息下的全部待显示媒资数据,生成下发数据。In this embodiment, after the server 400 obtains the media asset request sent by the display device 200, it can extract the user information from the media asset request, and then match the media asset data from the database according to the user information, thereby capturing all pending information under the user information. Display media asset data and generate and distribute data.
通过读取下发数据中每个待显示媒资的上下线状态,确定哪些媒资为下架媒资。即如果待显示媒资的上下线状态(online)为下线状态,标记对应待显示媒资为下架媒资。其中,上下线状态是根据预设规则确定的一种状态标记方式,可以根据媒资在数据库中的存储状态和/或运营活动中的设置状态进行综合评定。By reading the online and offline status of each media asset to be displayed in the distributed data, it is determined which media asset is the off-shelf media asset. That is, if the online status (online) of the media asset to be displayed is offline, mark the media asset corresponding to the media asset to be displayed as offline media asset. Among them, the online and offline status is a status marking method determined according to preset rules, and can be comprehensively evaluated according to the storage status of the media assets in the database and/or the setting status in the operation activities.
因此,在一些实施例中,如图20所示,遍历所述下发数据中的每个待显示媒资的上下线状态的步骤,包括:Therefore, in some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 20, the step of traversing the online and offline status of each media asset to be displayed in the delivered data includes:
S231B:获取待显示媒资的媒资状态;S231B: Obtain the media asset status of the media asset to be displayed;
S232B:如果所述运营上下线状态、第三方上下线状态以及售罄状态均为上线状态,则设置所述待显示媒资的上下线状态为上线状态;S232B: If the operation online status, the third-party online status, and the sold-out status are all online statuses, set the online status of the media assets to be displayed to the online status;
S233B:如果所述运营上下线状态、第三方上下线状态以及售罄状态中的任一项为下线状态,则设置所述待显示媒资的上下线状态为下线状态。S233B: If any one of the operational online/offline status, the third-party online/offline status, and the sold-out status is an offline state, set the online/offline status of the media asset to be displayed as an offline state.
本实施例中,待显示媒资的媒资状态,可以表示媒资在数据库中的存储状态,如运营上下线状态(available)和第三方上下线状态(status);以及待显示媒资在运营活动中的设置状态,如售罄状态(shelves)。In this embodiment, the media asset status of the media asset to be displayed may indicate the storage status of the media asset in the database, such as operational online status (available) and third-party online status (status); and the media asset to be displayed is in operation The setting status in the event, such as sold out status (shelves).
其中,运营上下线状态即服务器400中维持的媒资上下线状态,通常用于表征服务器400对应运营机构所创建或购买版权许可的媒资。运营上下线状态通常是由服务器400根 据运营规则进行修改,例如在版权到期时将从服务器400的运营系统中下架,从而将运营上下线状态更改为下线。Among them, the operation online and offline status refers to the online and offline status of media assets maintained in the server 400, and is generally used to characterize the media assets created or purchased by the operating agency corresponding to the server 400 for copyright licenses. The operating online and offline status is usually modified by the server 400 according to operating rules. For example, when the copyright expires, it will be removed from the operating system of the server 400, thereby changing the operating online and offline status to offline.
第三方上下线状态是由第三方服务器维持的媒资上下线状态,通常是与服务器400具有合作关系的机构所拥有版权的媒资。因此第三方上下线状态通常是由第三方服务器根据合作条例进行修改。例如,在运营机构与第三方机构之间的合约到期后,服务器400将无法再从第三方服务器中获取对应的媒资,相应的第三方上下线状态更改为下线。The third-party offline status is the online status of media assets maintained by a third-party server, and is usually media assets with copyrights owned by an organization that has a cooperative relationship with the server 400. Therefore, the third-party offline status is usually modified by the third-party server in accordance with the cooperation regulations. For example, after the contract between the operating organization and the third-party organization expires, the server 400 will no longer be able to obtain the corresponding media assets from the third-party server, and the corresponding third-party online status is changed to offline.
售罄状态是根据设置的活动起止时间,可自动变更的一种媒资状态。通常,当售罄状态为在线时,表示对应媒资还处于活动期间,用户可以通过活动规定的价格购买对应的媒资播放权利。如果用户购买了媒资播放权利,则可以正常使用媒资播放功能。当售罄状态为下线时,表示对应媒资已不在活动期间,用户不可以再通过活动规定的价格购买对应的媒资播放权利,但媒资播放服务仍旧正常运行,以供用户选择播放。The sold-out status is a media asset status that can be automatically changed according to the set start and end time of the event. Generally, when the sold-out status is online, it means that the corresponding media asset is still in the event period, and the user can purchase the corresponding media asset playback right at the price specified by the event. If the user purchases the right to play media assets, the media asset playback function can be used normally. When the sold-out status is offline, it means that the corresponding media asset is no longer in the event period, and the user can no longer purchase the corresponding media asset playback rights at the price specified in the event, but the media asset playback service is still running normally for users to choose to play.
为了确定待显示媒资的上下线状态,可以根据运营上下线状态、第三方上下线状态以及售罄状态确定上下线状态。即如果所述运营上下线状态、第三方上下线状态以及售罄状态均为上线状态,则设置所述待显示媒资的上下线状态为上线状态;如果所述运营上下线状态、第三方上下线状态以及售罄状态中的任一项为下线状态,则设置所述待显示媒资的上下线状态为下线状态。In order to determine the online and offline status of the media assets to be displayed, the online and offline status can be determined according to the operational online and offline status, the third-party online and offline status, and the sold-out status. That is, if the operational online status, third-party online status, and sold-out status are all online statuses, set the online status of the media assets to be displayed as online status; if the operational online status, third-party online status, and third-party online status If any one of the online status and the sold out status is an offline status, then the online status of the media asset to be displayed is set as an offline status.
可见,上述实施例中提供的媒资数据下发方法可以实现同一个媒资在不同界面是否下发的控制逻辑。例如,显示设备200可以通过调用服务器400中的面向终端系统接口获取课程基本信息。如果当前界面是已购课程界面,则媒资上下线状态为下线的媒资也能够下发,以在已购界面中显示已购的媒资;而对于其它界面,则需要将媒资上下线状态为下线的媒资过滤掉。It can be seen that the media asset data distribution method provided in the foregoing embodiment can implement the control logic of whether the same media asset is issued on different interfaces. For example, the display device 200 may obtain the basic information of the course by calling the terminal-oriented system interface in the server 400. If the current interface is the purchased course interface, the media assets whose online status is offline can also be issued to display the purchased media assets in the purchased interface; for other interfaces, the media assets need to be uploaded and downloaded. Media assets whose online status is offline are filtered out.
为了将下发数据中的下架媒资删除,在一些实施例中,如图21所示,根据所述用户信息提取下发数据的步骤后,所述方法还包括:In order to delete the off-shelf media assets in the distributed data, in some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 21, after the step of extracting the distributed data according to the user information, the method further includes:
S51B:调用内容系统接口;S51B: Call the content system interface;
S52B:根据所述显示界面类型设置内容系统中过滤模块的入口参数。S52B: Set the entry parameters of the filtering module in the content system according to the display interface type.
其中,根据所述显示界面类型设置内容系统中过滤模块的入口参数的步骤,包括:Wherein, the step of setting the entry parameters of the filtering module in the content system according to the display interface type includes:
S521B:如果所述显示界面类型为所述第一类界面,设置内容系统中过滤模块的入口参数为true;S521B: If the display interface type is the first type interface, set the entry parameter of the filtering module in the content system to true;
S522B:如果所述显示界面类型为所述第二类界面,设置内容系统中过滤模块的入口参数为false。S522B: If the display interface type is the second type interface, set the entry parameter of the filtering module in the content system to false.
对于服务器400,可以进一步设有面向终端系统接口以及内容系统接口,通过调用不同的接口,可以启用不同的处理模块。其中,当调用内容系统接口后,可以通过内容系统中的过滤模块对提取的数据进行筛选。如果所述显示界面类型为所述第一类界面,确定需要对下发数据中的下架媒资进行删除,因此可以启动过滤模块,即设置内容系统中过滤模块的入口参数为true。过滤模块可以在运行过程中,将会把下发数据中所有标记为下线的媒资进行删除。For the server 400, a terminal-oriented system interface and a content system interface can be further provided, and different processing modules can be activated by calling different interfaces. Among them, after calling the content system interface, the extracted data can be filtered through the filtering module in the content system. If the display interface type is the first type interface, it is determined that the off-shelf media assets in the issued data need to be deleted, so the filtering module can be started, that is, the entry parameter of the filtering module in the content system can be set to true. The filtering module can delete all media assets marked as offline in the distributed data during operation.
例如,显示设备200启动运行要显示的界面为首页界面。首页界面中的数据是服务器400在后台编排的,因此面向终端系统可以通过查询数据库获取到编排数据后,调用内容系统接口获取媒资详情,包括媒资海报、名称等,同时通过入参(filterOffline=true)将上下线状态online为下线的媒资过滤掉,此时内容系统只会返回online为上线状态的媒资。最后,面向终端系统再将内容过滤后的下发数据进行封装,发送给显示设备200以形成首页界面。For example, the interface to be displayed by the display device 200 at startup is the home page interface. The data in the homepage interface is arranged in the background by the server 400. Therefore, the terminal-oriented system can obtain the arrangement data by querying the database, and then call the content system interface to obtain media asset details, including media asset posters, names, etc., and pass the input (filterOffline =true) Filter out the media assets whose online status is offline. At this time, the content system will only return the media assets whose online status is online. Finally, the terminal-oriented system encapsulates the delivered data after content filtering, and sends it to the display device 200 to form a homepage interface.
如果显示界面类型为第二类界面,确定不需要对下发数据中的下架媒资进行删除,因此设置过滤模块的入口参数为false,即无需通过过滤模块对下发数据进行处理,直接将下发数据发送给显示设备200即可。If the display interface type is the second type of interface, it is determined that there is no need to delete the off-shelf media assets in the issued data, so set the entry parameter of the filter module to false, that is, there is no need to process the issued data through the filter module, and directly The data is issued and sent to the display device 200.
例如,如果用户已购媒资数据,面向终端系统首先调用会员接口获取当前登录用户已经购买的所有课程。然后调用内容系统接口获取对应的媒资详情,但此时内容系统入参(filterOffline=false),即设定内容系统不过滤online为下线的媒资。其中,如果用户购买的某个课程已经售罄(shelves=0),则课程上下线状态在内容系统即为下线状态(online=0),但由于设置入口参数filterOffline=false,所以内容系统还是会返回该课程的详情信息。For example, if the user has purchased media data, the terminal-oriented system first calls the member interface to obtain all courses that the currently logged-in user has purchased. Then call the content system interface to obtain the corresponding media asset details, but at this time the content system enters the parameter (filterOffline=false), that is, the content system is set not to filter online as offline media assets. Among them, if a certain course purchased by the user has been sold out (shelves=0), the online status of the course in the content system is the offline status (online=0), but because the entry parameter filterOffline=false is set, the content system is still Details of the course will be returned.
另外,在发送对应的下发数据之前还可以通过判断其他类型的媒资状态,来进一步对下发数据进行筛选处理,以确保发送给显示设备200的媒资数据都能够被正常显示。例如,面向终端系统除了获取媒资基本信息外,还需要内容系统返回运营上下线状态available,第三方上下线状态status,售罄状态shelves,从而确定媒资的上下线状态online。即面向终端系统在下发课程时会分别判断运营上下线状态available=1,第三方上下线状态status=1的媒资,售罄状态shelves=0的媒资进行下发。In addition, before sending the corresponding delivered data, the delivered data can be further filtered by judging the status of other types of media assets, so as to ensure that the media asset data sent to the display device 200 can be displayed normally. For example, in addition to obtaining the basic information of media assets, the terminal-oriented system also needs the content system to return the operational online and offline status available, the third-party online status status, and the sold out status to determine the online and offline status of the media asset online. That is to say, the terminal-oriented system will judge the media assets with the operational online status available = 1, the third-party online status status = 1, and the media assets with the sold-out status shelf = 0 for delivery.
实际应用中,在对下发数据进行上述实施例中的筛选后,可以获得适应不同显示界面类型的媒资数据。即所述方法还包括:向显示设备发送所述下架媒资。可见,相对于传统的媒资数据下发方法,可以直接向显示设备200发送当前显示界面能够直接应用的数据,无需显示设备200对数据进行二次筛选,因此能够适应多种显示设备200,还可以直接运行在客户端应用中,无需对显示设备200进行进大规模的功能配置。In actual applications, after the delivered data is filtered in the above-mentioned embodiments, media data suitable for different display interface types can be obtained. That is, the method further includes: sending the off-shelf media assets to a display device. It can be seen that, compared to the traditional media data delivery method, the data that can be directly applied on the current display interface can be directly sent to the display device 200 without the need for the display device 200 to perform secondary screening of the data, so it can be adapted to a variety of display devices 200, and It can be directly run in a client application, and there is no need to perform large-scale functional configuration of the display device 200.
基于上述媒资数据下发方法,本申请的部分实施例中,还提供一种服务器400,所述服务器400包括面向终端系统和内容系统,其中,面向终端系统被配置为:获取媒资请求,所述媒资请求包括用户信息以及显示界面类型,所述显示界面类型为第一类界面或第二类界面中的一种;以及,响应于所述媒资请求,根据所述用户信息提取下发数据,所述下发数据包括所述用户信息下已购的下架媒资。Based on the aforementioned media asset data distribution method, in some embodiments of the present application, a server 400 is further provided. The server 400 includes a terminal-oriented system and a content system, wherein the terminal-oriented system is configured to obtain a media asset request, The media asset request includes user information and a display interface type, and the display interface type is one of the first type of interface or the second type of interface; and, in response to the media asset request, the following is extracted according to the user information Sending data, where the issued data includes the purchased media assets under the user information.
内容系统被配置为:如果所述显示界面类型为所述第一类界面,删除所述下发数据中的所述下架媒资;如果所述显示界面类型为所述第二类界面,保留所述下发数据中的所述下架媒资。The content system is configured to: if the display interface type is the first type interface, delete the off-shelf media assets in the issued data; if the display interface type is the second type interface, keep The off-shelf media assets in the distributed data.
本实施例中提供的服务器可以在与显示设备建立通信连接后,通过面向终端系统实时获取显示设备发送的媒资请求,并响应于媒资请求,根据用户信息提取下发数据,从而设置内容系统中的数据过滤方式,如果显示界面类型为第一类界面,删除下发数据中的下架 媒资,如果显示界面类型为第二类界面,保留下发数据中的下架媒资,以将下架媒资下发至显示设备。所述服务器通过执行上述媒资数据下发方法,针对不同的显示界面,下发不同的媒资数据,实现在媒资下架后仍可反馈下发数据,缓解显示错误的问题。The server provided in this embodiment can obtain the media asset request sent by the display device in real time through the terminal system after establishing a communication connection with the display device, and in response to the media asset request, extract and distribute data based on user information, thereby setting up the content system In the data filtering method, if the display interface type is the first type of interface, delete the off-list media assets in the issued data. If the display interface type is the second type of interface, keep the off-listed media assets in the issued data to remove The off-shelf media assets are delivered to the display device. The server delivers different media asset data for different display interfaces by executing the aforementioned media asset data distribution method, so that the data can still be fed back after the media asset is off the shelf, and the problem of display errors can be alleviated.
我的应用模块的管理My application module management
对于“应用”频道,可以在用户选择后,在内容区显示当前显示设备中已安装的应用图标和应用名称。显示设备中已安装的应用可以包括系统应用的第三方应用。为了适应教育模式可以对已安装的应用进行筛选,只显示教育相关的应用。例如,可以通过服务器远程配置显示在教育模式中的应用名单,再通过已安装的应用与应用名单进行逐一匹配,如果任一已安装应用在应用名单中,则在内容区显示该应用。For the "application" channel, after the user selects it, the icon and name of the application installed in the current display device can be displayed in the content area. The installed applications in the display device may include third-party applications of system applications. In order to adapt to the education mode, the installed applications can be filtered, and only education-related applications are displayed. For example, the application list displayed in the education mode can be configured remotely through the server, and then the installed applications can be matched with the application list one by one. If any installed application is in the application list, the application will be displayed in the content area.
为了防止用户误操作,在教育模式下,可以设置应用仅支持展示和打开,不支持对应用进行更新和卸载。In order to prevent users from misoperation, in the education mode, you can set the application to only support display and opening, and not support the update and uninstall of the application.
在本申请的部分实施例中,还可以根据显示界面的大小设定多个应用图标的排布方式,可以通过滚动页面和/或添加“全部应用入口”卡片的方式实现对多个应用进行显示。例如,如图22所示,在内容区设有10个应用的显示位,当可显示的应用数量小于或等于10个时,可以不显示全部应用入口对应的卡片;而当可显示的应用数量大于10个时,可以显示其中9个应用,其他应用通过全部应用入口进行归类,并在用户点击“全部应用入口”卡片后,在弹出的应用界面中进行显示。In some embodiments of this application, the arrangement of multiple application icons can also be set according to the size of the display interface, and multiple applications can be displayed by scrolling the page and/or adding a "All Application Entry" card . For example, as shown in Figure 22, there are 10 application display positions in the content area. When the number of applications that can be displayed is less than or equal to 10, the cards corresponding to all application entries may not be displayed; and when the number of applications that can be displayed When the number is greater than 10, 9 of them can be displayed. Other applications are categorized through the All Application Portal and displayed in the pop-up application interface after the user clicks the "All Application Portal" card.
上述实施例示出了开机导航后进入教育模式所对应的显示方式。在实际应用中,还可以从标准模式进入教育模式,并且在运行中随意切换模式。The foregoing embodiment shows the display mode corresponding to the education mode after the navigation is turned on. In practical applications, you can also enter the education mode from the standard mode, and switch modes at will during operation.
在一些实施例中,如图29所示,在应用程序界面中,可以对显示设备200中安装的应用程序进行显示,用户可以通过控制装置100或者触摸屏触控等方式,在应用程序界面中选择任一应用程序启动运行,使当前显示画面跳转至所启动的应用界面。因此,所述应用程序界面可以作为应用程序的展示界面和应用程序的统一启动入口。In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 29, in the application interface, the application installed in the display device 200 can be displayed, and the user can select in the application interface by controlling the device 100 or touching the touch screen. When any application is started, the current display screen jumps to the started application interface. Therefore, the application program interface can be used as the display interface of the application program and the unified start entry of the application program.
在应用程序界面中,可以图标和/或文字的形式对每个应用程序进行展示,并且多个应用程序图标可以按照特定的规则排列,形成图标阵列。例如,系统应用可以优先显示在图标阵列的顶部区域显示,第三方应用程序可以按照安装的先后顺序依次显示;也可以按照应用程序的名称、类型或使用频率对应用程序图标进行排列,或者自定义应用程序图标的排列顺序。In the application program interface, each application program can be displayed in the form of icons and/or text, and multiple application program icons can be arranged according to specific rules to form an icon array. For example, system applications can be displayed first in the top area of the icon array, and third-party applications can be displayed in sequence according to the order of installation; the application icons can also be arranged according to the name, type or frequency of use of the application, or customized The order in which the application icons are arranged.
在一些实施例中,显示设备200还可以对显示的应用程序进行筛选,以根据不同的应用场景调整应用程序界面中所显示的内容。例如,可以通过家长模式,设置不能打开的应用程序,从而在家长模式下应用程序界面只显示能够被打开的应用程序,而其他应用程序被隐藏。同理,在教育模式下,也可以只显示与教育有关的应用程序,如教育类应用和部分必要的系统应用,而隐藏其他非必要的应用程序。In some embodiments, the display device 200 may also filter the displayed application programs to adjust the content displayed in the application program interface according to different application scenarios. For example, you can set the applications that cannot be opened through the parental mode, so that in the parental mode, the application interface only displays the applications that can be opened, while other applications are hidden. Similarly, in the education mode, it is also possible to display only education-related applications, such as educational applications and some necessary system applications, while hiding other non-essential applications.
其中,所述教育模式是相对于标准模式所预设的一种特殊显示模式。在教育模式下,操作界面的UI风格以及交互方式可以与标准模式下的UI风格和交互方式不同。通常用户可以通过模式选择画面进入教育模式。例如,在开机导航过程中,在模式选择界面选中教 育模式按钮,以进入教育模式。Wherein, the education mode is a special display mode preset relative to the standard mode. In the education mode, the UI style and interaction method of the operation interface can be different from the UI style and interaction method in the standard mode. Usually users can enter the education mode through the mode selection screen. For example, during the boot navigation process, select the education mode button on the mode selection interface to enter the education mode.
在进入教育模式后,显示设备200可以为用户呈现教育模式的控制主页,用户可以通过在控制主页上执行交互操作,实现与教育相关的功能。例如,可以通过在控制主页上点击任一课程资源,播放该课程视频。用户还可以在控制主页中启动第三方应用程序,以通过第三方应用程序获取课程资源。After entering the education mode, the display device 200 can present a control homepage in the education mode to the user, and the user can perform interactive operations on the control homepage to implement education-related functions. For example, you can click any course resource on the control homepage to play the course video. Users can also start a third-party application in the control homepage to obtain course resources through the third-party application.
由于在教育模式下,用户通常不使用除教育类应用以外的其他应用,因此为了便于用户启动,显示设备200可以在应用程序界面中仅显示部分应用,例如,如图30所示,教育模式下的应用程序界面仅显示教育类应用程序。In the education mode, the user usually does not use other applications other than the education application, so in order to facilitate the user to start, the display device 200 may only display part of the application in the application program interface, for example, as shown in FIG. 30, in the education mode The application interface of only displays educational applications.
在一些实施例中,教育触屏模式下,终端会请求系统端,获取到可以展示的应用列表数据,终端拿到本地安装的应用数据,根据包名进行对比,本地安装应用如果在可展示应用列表中,则在终端我的应用中展示,否则不在我的应用中展示。可展示的应用列表是指可以在教育模式下展示的应用的列表,可以是用户预先设置的,也可以是终端根据应用的标签自动判定的。这样可以避免不适用教育的应用在学习者使用过程中展开,例如:系统中安装了游戏1应用,在标准模式下展示,在教育触屏模式下,经可展示的应用列表过滤后不再展示。In some embodiments, in the educational touch screen mode, the terminal will request the system to obtain the application list data that can be displayed. The terminal will obtain the locally installed application data and compare it according to the package name. If the locally installed application is in the displayable application In the list, it will be displayed in the terminal my application, otherwise it will not be displayed in my application. The displayable application list refers to a list of applications that can be displayed in the education mode, which may be preset by the user, or may be automatically determined by the terminal according to the label of the application. This can prevent applications that are not suitable for education from expanding during the learner's use. For example, the game 1 application is installed in the system and displayed in the standard mode. In the educational touch screen mode, it will not be displayed after being filtered by the displayable application list. .
在一些实施例中,教育模式下的应用展示预设的个数,在可展示的应用较多时,增加用于展开应用列表的“全部应用界面”。In some embodiments, a preset number of applications are displayed in the education mode. When there are more applications that can be displayed, an "all application interface" for expanding the application list is added.
在一些实施例中,会根据展示的应用相关联的应用进行应用推荐,并将其展示在应用界面中,在一些实施例中,和安装的应用混排展示。例如第四个位置的已安装的应用对应有可推荐应用,则在第五个展示对应位置4处的已安装应用对应的推荐应用,第六个位置展示其他应用。In some embodiments, application recommendations are made based on the applications associated with the displayed applications and displayed in the application interface. In some embodiments, they are displayed in a mixed arrangement with installed applications. For example, the installed application at the fourth position corresponds to a recommendable application, the recommended application corresponding to the installed application at the corresponding position 4 is displayed in the fifth position, and other applications are displayed in the sixth position.
在一些实施例中,按照应用界面中已安装应用的次序进行推荐应用的展示,在展示的推荐应用超出预设个数时(例如超出2个时),位置靠后的已安装应用不再进行推荐应用的展示。In some embodiments, the recommended applications are displayed in the order of the installed applications in the application interface. When the number of recommended applications displayed exceeds a preset number (for example, when it exceeds 2), the installed applications at the lower position will not be displayed. Showcase of recommended apps.
在一些实施例中,按照用界面中已安装应用的综合排序(例如,热搜,下载量,使用频率等中的至少一个参数)进行推荐应用的展示,在展示的推荐应用超出预设个数时(例如超出2个时),顺序靠后的已安装应用不再进行推荐应用的展示。In some embodiments, the recommended applications are displayed according to the comprehensive ranking of the installed applications in the user interface (for example, at least one parameter among hot searches, downloads, frequency of use, etc.), and the number of recommended applications displayed exceeds the preset number When (for example, when more than 2), the installed apps in the lower order will no longer be displayed as recommended apps.
本申请部分实施例中提供一种应用程序界面显示方法,如图31所示,所述应用程序界面显示方法包括:Some embodiments of this application provide an application program interface display method. As shown in FIG. 31, the application program interface display method includes:
S1C:获取用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令。S1C: Obtain the control instructions used to display the application program interface.
实际应用中,用户可以输入控制指令,以控制显示设备200展示应用程序界面。用户可以通过多种方式输入的控制指令,例如,用户可以在教育模式的控制主页中选择切换区内的标签“应用”切换至应用程序界面。具体的操作方式可以为:在进入教育模式主页后,通过控制装置100的方向键,将焦点光标移动至“应用”标签上,此时,显示设备200可以自动将内容区显示的画面切换至应用程序界面。In actual applications, the user can input control instructions to control the display device 200 to display the application program interface. The user can input control instructions in a variety of ways. For example, the user can select the label "application" in the switching area in the control homepage of the education mode to switch to the application program interface. The specific operation method may be: after entering the education mode homepage, using the arrow keys of the control device 100 to move the focus cursor to the "application" tab, at this time, the display device 200 can automatically switch the screen displayed in the content area to the application Program interface.
用户还可以通过触控操作或者语音输入的方式,输入用于展示应用程序界面的控制指 令。例如,用户通过触控操作在控制主页中点击“应用”控件,使显示设备200的控制主页内容区切换至应用程序界面。又例如,用户可以通过显示设备200内置的智能语音系统输入语音信息,如“显示应用”、“显示应用界面”。显示设备200接收到语音信息后,可以将控制主页内容区切换至应用程序界面。The user can also input control instructions for displaying the application program interface through touch operation or voice input. For example, the user clicks the “application” control in the control homepage through a touch operation, so that the content area of the control homepage of the display device 200 is switched to the application program interface. For another example, the user can input voice information through the intelligent voice system built into the display device 200, such as "display application" and "display application interface". After the display device 200 receives the voice information, it can switch the control homepage content area to the application program interface.
S2C:在标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据全部本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表;S2C: In the standard mode, in response to the control instruction, generate an application list in the application program interface according to all local applications;
在获取用户输入的控制指令以后,显示设备200的控制器250可以对当前显示设备200的模式进行判断。如果当前模式为标准模式,则响应于控制指令,根据全部本地应用生成应用程序界面的应用列表。After acquiring the control instruction input by the user, the controller 250 of the display device 200 may determine the current mode of the display device 200. If the current mode is the standard mode, in response to the control instruction, an application list of the application program interface is generated according to all local applications.
例如,用户在标准模式下进入“我的应用”界面时,相当于输入了用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令。控制器250在接收到控制指令后,可以对显示设备200当前所处的模式进行判断,即确定当前模式为标准模式。此时,控制器250可以直接提取本地安装的应用信息,并将全部本地应用对应的显示内容进行提取,从而生成应用程序界面的显示列表,以在“我的应用”界面显示全部本地应用。For example, when the user enters the "My Application" interface in the standard mode, it is equivalent to inputting a control instruction for displaying the application program interface. After receiving the control instruction, the controller 250 can determine the current mode of the display device 200, that is, determine that the current mode is the standard mode. At this time, the controller 250 can directly extract the locally installed application information, and extract the display content corresponding to all the local applications, thereby generating a display list of the application program interface to display all the local applications on the "My Application" interface.
其中,应用程序界面中的应用列表可以包括对应要显示应用程序的图标、名称等信息。在控制器250生成应用列表后,可以根据操作系统中内置的显示程序,生成应用程序界面中的具体显示内容,以显示在应用程序界面中。Wherein, the application list in the application program interface may include information such as icons and names corresponding to the application programs to be displayed. After the controller 250 generates the application list, the specific display content in the application program interface may be generated according to the display program built in the operating system to be displayed in the application program interface.
另外,控制器250在执行显示程序时,还可以对待显示的应用程序信息进行统一优化处理,以获得更好的显示效果。例如,对应用程序图标进行变形、透明、动画、圆角等处理,以使应用程序界面中显示的应用程序图标风格趋于统一,以带来更好的显示效果。In addition, when the controller 250 executes the display program, it can also perform unified optimization processing on the application program information to be displayed to obtain a better display effect. For example, the application icon is deformed, transparent, animated, rounded, etc., so that the style of the application icon displayed in the application interface tends to be unified, so as to bring a better display effect.
可见,在标准模式下,应用程序界面中显示的内容即所有本地应用,无需对显示的应用进行筛选,以便用户可以在应用程序界面中执行常规的操作。例如,用户在点击任一应用程序图标时,启动运行该应用程序。It can be seen that in the standard mode, the content displayed in the application program interface is all local applications, and there is no need to filter the displayed applications so that the user can perform routine operations in the application program interface. For example, when the user clicks any application icon, the application starts to run.
S3C:在非标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据在预置可展示应用列表中的本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表。S3C: In the non-standard mode, in response to the control instruction, the application list in the application program interface is generated according to the local applications in the preset displayable application list.
在获取用户输入的控制指令以后,如果通过判断确定当前显示设备200的模式为非标准模式,则响应于控制指令,根据预置的可展示应用列表中的本地应用,生成应用程序界面中的应用列表,即根据预置的可展示应用列表对本地应用进行筛选之后,再对本地应用进行显示。After obtaining the control instruction input by the user, if it is determined that the mode of the current display device 200 is a non-standard mode through judgment, in response to the control instruction, the application in the application program interface is generated according to the local application in the preset displayable application list List, that is, display the local application after filtering the local application according to the preset displayable application list.
例如,用户在教育模式下进入“我的应用”界面时,输入用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令。由于当前模式是教育模式,即非标准模式,因此需要对应用程序界面中显示的应用进行筛选,隐藏与当前教育模式无关的应用,只显示教育类应用。For example, when the user enters the "My Application" interface in the education mode, he enters a control instruction for displaying the application program interface. Since the current mode is an education mode, that is, a non-standard mode, it is necessary to filter the applications displayed in the application program interface, hide applications that are not related to the current education mode, and only display educational applications.
而为了实现对显示的本地应用进行筛选,在获取到控制指令后,可以先提取预置可展示应用列表。其中,预置可展示应用列表中包括多个预设的可展示应用信息,可以是一个由运营服务器统一制作的总表,也可以是由显示设备200根据本地应用而制定列表。可展示应用列表和非标准模式相对应,即在不同的非标准模式下,预置可展示应用列表也不同。 例如,在教育模式下,预置可展示应用列表中包括教育类应用相关的信息;在家长模式下,预置可展示应用列表中包括家长手动添加的可展示的应用信息;在老人模式下,预置可展示应用列表中包括可支持老年显示模式的应用信息。In order to filter the displayed local applications, after obtaining the control instruction, the preset displayable application list can be extracted first. Wherein, the preset displayable application list includes multiple preset displayable application information, which may be a general table uniformly produced by the operation server, or may be a list prepared by the display device 200 according to local applications. The displayable application list corresponds to the non-standard mode, that is, in different non-standard modes, the preset displayable application list is also different. For example, in the education mode, the preset displayable application list includes information related to education applications; in the parent mode, the preset displayable application list includes the displayable application information manually added by the parent; in the elderly mode, The preset displayable application list includes application information that can support the elderly display mode.
预置可展示应用列表可以在显示设备200的本地数据库中提取,也可以从服务器400的数据库中提取。在提取预置可展示应用列表后,控制器250可以根据预置可展示应用列表中的本地应用逐一对显示设备200中安装的全部本地应用进行筛选,从而隐藏与当前非标准模式无关的应用,只显示预置可展示应用列表中的应用。The preset displayable application list can be extracted from the local database of the display device 200 or from the database of the server 400. After extracting the preset displayable application list, the controller 250 can filter all the local applications installed in the display device 200 one by one according to the local applications in the preset displayable application list, thereby hiding applications that are not related to the current non-standard mode. Only show the apps in the preset to show the app list.
可见,根据上述实施例,本申请提供的显示设备200以及应用程序界面显示方法可以在接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令后,对当前显示设备200所处的模式进行判断,如果是标准模式,则显示全部本地应用;如果是非标准模式,则根据预置的可展示应用列表对本地应用进行筛选,从而只显示预置可展示应用列表中的应用。所述方法可以在不同模式下显示不同的应用程序界面内容,简化应用程序界面,便于用户及时找到当前模式相对应的应用。It can be seen that, according to the above-mentioned embodiment, the display device 200 and the application program interface display method provided by the present application can judge the current mode of the display device 200 after receiving the control instruction for displaying the application program interface, if it is the standard mode , Then all local applications are displayed; if it is in non-standard mode, the local applications are filtered according to the preset displayable application list, so that only the applications in the preset displayable application list are displayed. The method can display different application program interface contents in different modes, simplify the application program interface, and facilitate the user to find the application corresponding to the current mode in time.
在一些实施例中,为了对应用程序界面中展示的应用进行筛选,在非标准模式下,根据在预置可展示应用列表中的本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表的步骤包括:响应于所述控制指令,从服务器中获取当前非标准模式对应的可展示应用列表,根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用,如果在所述可展示应用列表中匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,在所述应用程序界面中显示所述本地应用,如果在所述可展示应用列表中未匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,隐藏所述本地应用。In some embodiments, in order to filter the applications displayed in the application program interface, in the non-standard mode, the step of generating the application list in the application program interface according to the local applications in the preset displayable application list includes: responding to The control instruction is to obtain from the server a list of displayable applications corresponding to the current non-standard mode, and match the local application in the list of displayable applications according to the package name information, if the local application is matched in the list of displayable applications The package name information of the application is displayed in the application program interface, and if the package name information of the local application is not matched in the displayable application list, the local application is hidden.
响应于所述控制指令,从服务器中获取当前非标准模式对应的可展示应用列表可以是:In response to the control instruction, obtaining the displayable application list corresponding to the current non-standard mode from the server may be:
在获取用户输入的控制指令后,显示设备200可以响应于该控制指令,控制显示器显示应用程序界面。为了对所显示的应用进行筛选,显示设备200在接收到控制指令后,可以向服务器300发送显示请求,以从服务器300中获取可展示应用列表。After acquiring the control instruction input by the user, the display device 200 may control the display to display the application program interface in response to the control instruction. In order to filter the displayed applications, after receiving the control instruction, the display device 200 may send a display request to the server 300 to obtain a list of displayable applications from the server 300.
其中,可展示应用列表是服务器300根据预先设定的应用分类规则,针对每个应用程序制定的一个可实时更新的列表。由于在不同的显示模式下,应用程序界面可以显示不同的内容,因此需要服务器300设置不同的应用列表。例如,在教育模式下,获取的可展示应用列表中可包括教育类应用程序相关的信息,例如包名信息等。The displayable application list is a real-time updateable list formulated by the server 300 for each application according to preset application classification rules. Since the application program interface can display different content in different display modes, it is necessary for the server 300 to set different application lists. For example, in the education mode, the acquired displayable application list may include information related to education applications, such as package name information.
可展示应用列表可以是由服务器300根据应用商店内注册登记的各应用信息制定。例如,服务器300中可以内置一个可实时更新的制表程序,该程序可以构建一个初始列表,用于存储当前应用商店内注册的所有教育类应用的信息,并通过与应用商店对应的数据库建立通信连接,实时(或周期性)获取应用商店数据库中注册的数据,从而对可展示应用列表进行更新。当应用商店内注册了新的教育类应用时,则可以将新增的教育类信息增加至可展示应用列表。The displayable application list may be formulated by the server 300 according to the information of each application registered in the application store. For example, a real-time updateable tabulation program can be built in the server 300, which can build an initial list for storing information of all educational applications registered in the current application store, and establish communication through the database corresponding to the application store Connect to obtain the data registered in the application store database in real time (or periodically), thereby updating the list of displayable applications. When a new educational application is registered in the application store, the new educational information can be added to the list of displayable applications.
可展示应用列表也可以是由服务器300根据显示设备200上报的用户设置信息制定。例如,用户可以通过显示设备200自定义教育模式下应用程序界面可展示的应用程序,并将自定义的设置信息作为用户数据发送至服务器300端,服务器300根据显示设备200上 报的用户设置信息制定规则并对应用商店中的应用进行筛选,以形成可展示应用列表并进行存储。在显示设备200发送显示请求时,可以向显示设备200反馈存储的可展示应用列表。The displayable application list may also be formulated by the server 300 according to the user setting information reported by the display device 200. For example, the user can customize the applications that can be displayed on the application program interface in the education mode through the display device 200, and send the customized setting information to the server 300 as user data, and the server 300 makes the settings according to the user setting information reported by the display device 200. Rules and filters applications in the application store to form a displayable application list and store it. When the display device 200 sends a display request, the stored displayable application list may be fed back to the display device 200.
此外,可展示应用列表还可以采用上述两种制定方式相结合的方式进行制定和更新。例如,在显示设备200首次进入教育模式或用户未自定义设置时,根据应用商店内注册登记的应用程序信息制定可展示应用列表,而在用户自定义设置后,根据用户自定义的方式制定可展示应用列表。In addition, the displayable application list can also be formulated and updated by combining the above two formulation methods. For example, when the display device 200 enters the education mode for the first time or the user does not customize the settings, the list of available applications is formulated according to the application information registered in the application store, and after the user-defined settings, the available applications are formulated according to the user-defined method. Show the list of applications.
根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用可以包括:Matching local applications in the displayable application list according to package name information may include:
显示设备200的控制器250在获取可展示应用列表后,可以根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用。实际匹配过程中,显示设备200可以先提取本地安装的应用数据,并根据本地安装的应用数据制定一个本地应用列表,同时将本地应用列表与获取的可展示应用列表进行对比,从而对本地应用进行筛选。After obtaining the displayable application list, the controller 250 of the display device 200 may match the local application in the displayable application list according to the package name information. In the actual matching process, the display device 200 may first extract the locally installed application data, and formulate a local application list according to the locally installed application data, and compare the local application list with the obtained displayable application list, so as to perform the local application filter.
在实际匹配过程中,显示设备200通过对比本地应用列表和可展示应用列表,可以确定本地应用列表中哪些应用的包名信息在可展示应用列表中,哪些应用的包名信息不在应用列表中,以获得匹配结果。同时,通过对比还可以确定在可展示应用列表中,哪些应用的包名信息不在本地应用列表中,以作为推荐应用,方便用户下载安装更多类型的教育类应用程序。In the actual matching process, the display device 200 can determine which application package name information in the local application list is in the displayable application list and which application package name information is not in the application list by comparing the local application list and the displayable application list. To obtain matching results. At the same time, through comparison, it can be determined that in the displayable application list, the package name information of which applications are not in the local application list can be used as recommended applications to facilitate users to download and install more types of educational applications.
显然,在可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用的过程并不局限于上述示出的一种匹配方式,还可以根据不同显示设备200的操作系统类型,使用其他的匹配方式。例如,在获取可展示应用列表后,可依次以每个本地应用的包名信息作为索引值,在可展示应用列表中进行遍历操作,确定本地应用的包名信息是否在可展示应用列表中。如果本地应用的包名信息与可展示应用列表中任一表项中的信息相同,则确定在可展示应用列表中匹配到这个本地应用的包名信息。Obviously, the process of matching local applications in the displayable application list is not limited to the above-mentioned matching method, and other matching methods can also be used according to the operating system types of different display devices 200. For example, after obtaining the list of displayable applications, the package name information of each local application can be used as an index value in turn to perform a traversal operation in the list of displayable applications to determine whether the package name information of the local application is in the list of displayable applications. If the package name information of the local application is the same as the information in any entry in the displayable application list, it is determined that the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list.
如果在所述可展示应用列表中匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,在所述应用程序界面中显示所述本地应用可以包括:If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, displaying the local application in the application program interface may include:
通过在可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用,可以确定本地应用是否在可展示应用列表中,即确定当前显示模式下可以启动的本地应用。如果在可展示应用列表中匹配到本地应用的包名信息,则确定对应的本地应用可以在当前模式下启动运行,因此可以在应用程序界面中显示该本地应用。By matching the local application in the displayable application list, it can be determined whether the local application is in the displayable application list, that is, the local application that can be started in the current display mode can be determined. If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, it is determined that the corresponding local application can be started and run in the current mode, so the local application can be displayed in the application program interface.
再通过重复上述匹配过程,直到将全部本地应用的包名信息都进行对比后,则可以确定在当前显示模式下的可以展示的应用,以便将可以展示的应用全部展示在应用程序界面中,以供用户选择。By repeating the above matching process, until the package name information of all local applications is compared, the applications that can be displayed in the current display mode can be determined, so that all the applications that can be displayed are displayed in the application program interface. For users to choose.
由以上技术方案可知,本申请提供的应用程序界面显示方法可以应用在显示设备200中,在用户输入用于显示应用程序界面的控制指令后,从服务器300中获取可展示应用列表,并根据包名信息在可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用。如果在可展示应用列表中匹配到本地应用的包名信息,在应用程序界面中显示本地应用。所述方法可以在教育模式下,实 现对本地应用进行筛选,从而在教育模式下的应用程序界面中仅显示与教育模式相关的应用程序,便于用户启动运行教育类应用,解决传统智能电视需要较长时间才能够从众多应用程序中找到教育类应用程序的问题。It can be seen from the above technical solutions that the application program interface display method provided by the present application can be applied to the display device 200. After the user inputs a control instruction for displaying the application program interface, the displayable application list is obtained from the server 300, and the application program interface is displayed according to the package. The name information matches the local application in the displayable application list. If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, the local application is displayed in the application program interface. The method can realize filtering of local applications in the education mode, so that only the applications related to the education mode are displayed in the application program interface in the education mode, which is convenient for users to start and run educational applications, and solves the needs of traditional smart TVs. It took a long time to find the problems of educational applications in many applications.
根据上述实施例,可以对包名信息匹配成功的本地应用进行显示,而对于包名信息未匹配成功的本地应用,则不在应用程序界面中进行显示,因此,在一些实施例中,所述应用程序界面显示方法还包括:According to the above-mentioned embodiment, the local application whose package name information matches successfully can be displayed, while the local application whose package name information does not match successfully is not displayed in the application program interface. Therefore, in some embodiments, the application The program interface display method also includes:
如果在所述可展示应用列表中未匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,隐藏所述本地应用可以包括:If the package name information of the local application is not matched in the displayable application list, hiding the local application may include:
通过可展示应用列表中未匹配到的本地应用进行隐藏,可以隐藏多数非教育类应用程序,使得显示设备200在教育模式下的应用程序界面中,展示较少数量的应用,并且这些应用都是与教育相关的应用程序,以便于用户快速找出要启动的教育类应用,提高用户体验。By hiding local applications that are not matched in the displayable application list, most non-educational applications can be hidden, so that the display device 200 displays a smaller number of applications in the application program interface in the education mode, and these applications are all Education-related applications, so that users can quickly find out which educational applications to start, and improve user experience.
例如,在显示设备200中安装了30个应用程序,其中有3个应用程序为教育类应用,则在不使用上述实施例中的应用程序界面显示方法时,用户需要在应用程序界面中30个图标中找到这3个应用程序图标。需要用户多次按压控制装置100上的方向键,以将焦点光标移动至要启动的教育类应用程序的图标上。而采用上述实施例中的应用程序界面显示方法后,由于3个教育类应用程序以外的其他应用程序被隐藏,用户仅需要在3个教育类应用程序中选择启动的应用程序即可,大大减轻了寻找应用时的工作量,并且简化用户的操作,使用户最多3次按键即可将移动焦点光标移动至应用程序对应的位置,也减轻的用户的操作复杂度。For example, 30 application programs are installed in the display device 200, and 3 of them are educational applications. When the application program interface display method in the above embodiment is not used, the user needs to display 30 application programs in the application program interface. Find these 3 application icons in the icons. The user is required to press the arrow keys on the control device 100 multiple times to move the focus cursor to the icon of the educational application to be started. However, after the application interface display method in the above embodiment is adopted, since other applications other than the three educational applications are hidden, the user only needs to select the application to start from among the three educational applications, which greatly reduces This saves the workload when searching for applications, and simplifies the user's operation, so that the user can move the focus cursor to the corresponding position of the application by pressing the key three times at most, which also reduces the user's operational complexity.
由于不同的显示模式下,可以展示的应用不同,因此对于本地应用进行筛选的方式也不同。例如,在教育模式下应用程序界面可以显示教育类应用;在家长模式下应用程序界面可以显示用户指定的应用。不同的显示模式可以通过不同的可展示应用列表进行筛选,即在一些实施例中,如图32所示,从服务器300中获取可展示应用列表的步骤,包括:Since the applications that can be displayed are different in different display modes, the filtering methods for local applications are also different. For example, in the education mode, the application program interface can display educational applications; in the parent mode, the application program interface can display applications specified by the user. Different display modes can be filtered by different displayable application lists. That is, in some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 32, the step of obtaining the displayable application list from the server 300 includes:
S211C:向所述服务器发送显示请求;S211C: Send a display request to the server;
S212C:接收所述服务器反馈的可展示应用列表。S212C: Receive the displayable application list fed back by the server.
显示设备200在接收到用户输入的控制指令后,可以在显示应用程序界面前,向服务器300发送显示请求。其中,所述显示请求包括当前场景信息,例如场景号等信息。场景号是根据显示设备200所支持的场景,按照预设规则编号而生成的字符串信息,例如,mode00代表标准模式;mode01代表教育模式等。After receiving the control instruction input by the user, the display device 200 may send a display request to the server 300 before displaying the application program interface. Wherein, the display request includes current scene information, such as scene number and other information. The scene number is character string information generated according to the preset rule number according to the scenes supported by the display device 200, for example, mode00 represents the standard mode; mode01 represents the education mode and so on.
显示设备200在将带有当前场景信息的显示请求发送至服务器300后,服务器300可以根据当前场景信息反馈相适应的可展示应用列表,以使显示设备200接收可展示应用列表。例如,显示设备200发送的显示请求中包括当前场景号为mode01,即显示设备200当前处于教育模式。服务器300在对当前场景号进行提取后,于存储的可展示列表中选择教育模式对应的可展示应用列表,并将可展示应用列表反馈给显示设备200。After the display device 200 sends a display request with current scene information to the server 300, the server 300 may feed back a suitable displayable application list according to the current scene information, so that the display device 200 receives the displayable application list. For example, the display request sent by the display device 200 includes the current scene number as mode01, that is, the display device 200 is currently in the education mode. After the server 300 extracts the current scene number, it selects the displayable application list corresponding to the education mode from the stored displayable list, and feeds back the displayable application list to the display device 200.
可见,上述可展示应用列表的反馈方式,能够使得服务器300快速向显示设备200反 馈可展示应用列表,减少用户在进入应用程序界面的等待时间。It can be seen that the above feedback manner of the displayable application list can enable the server 300 to quickly feed back the displayable application list to the display device 200, reducing the waiting time for the user to enter the application program interface.
所述可展示应用列表还可以是服务器300根据当前场景信息筛选的应用列表,即在服务器300中,可以不存储众多可展示应用列表,而是在服务器300接收到显示请求后,从应用商店的注册信息中提取全部应用程序信息,并根据显示请求中包含的当前场景号对提取的应用程序信息进行筛选,从而生成可展示应用列表。例如,显示设备200发送的显示请求中包括当前场景号为mode01,则服务器300先从应用商店的数据库中提取全部应用程序信息,再从提取的信息中筛选出教育类应用,从而生成符合教育模式的可展示应用列表,反馈给显示设备200。The displayable application list may also be an application list filtered by the server 300 according to the current scene information. That is, the server 300 may not store a large number of displayable application lists, but after the server 300 receives the display request, the list of applications from the application store All application information is extracted from the registration information, and the extracted application information is filtered according to the current scene number included in the display request, thereby generating a displayable application list. For example, if the display request sent by the display device 200 includes the current scene number as mode01, the server 300 first extracts all application information from the database of the application store, and then filters out educational applications from the extracted information, thereby generating a model that meets the educational model. The list of displayable applications is fed back to the display device 200.
可见,这种反馈可展示应用列表的方式无需长期占用服务器300的存储空间,同时服务器300无需长期维护可展示应用列表,减少对服务器300的运算能力的浪费。而为了减少进入应用程序界面的等待时间,还可以在进入显示模式时即向服务器300发送显示请求,以获取可展示应用列表,并通过后台程序对本地应用进行筛选,以便在用户切换至应用程序界面时,直接显示筛选结果。此时,用户输入的用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令可以是用户选择显示模式时的控制指令。It can be seen that this feedback method of displaying the application list does not need to occupy the storage space of the server 300 for a long time, and the server 300 does not need to maintain the displayable application list for a long time, thereby reducing the waste of the computing power of the server 300. In order to reduce the waiting time for entering the application program interface, it is also possible to send a display request to the server 300 when entering the display mode to obtain a list of displayable applications, and to filter the local applications through the background program so that the user can switch to the application program. When the interface is displayed, the screening results are directly displayed. At this time, the control instruction input by the user for displaying the application program interface may be the control instruction when the user selects the display mode.
根据上述实施例中提供的应用界面显示方法,通过可展示应用列表对本地应用进行筛选后,通常应用程序界面中可显示的应用数量将大幅减少。如果用户显示设备200中安装的可展示的应用较少,例如教育类应用数量较少,则在筛选后的应用程序界面中显示的应用程序过少,将有大面积的显示空间被浪费。为了充分利用显示空间,在不增加用户操作复杂度的前提下,还可以利用这部分显示空间,显示一些符合当前显示模式的推荐应用。According to the application interface display method provided in the above embodiment, after the local applications are filtered through the displayable application list, the number of applications that can be displayed in the application interface will generally be greatly reduced. If there are few displayable applications installed in the user display device 200, for example, a small number of educational applications, there are too few applications displayed in the screened application program interface, and a large area of display space will be wasted. In order to make full use of the display space, this part of the display space can also be used to display some recommended applications that conform to the current display mode without increasing the complexity of user operations.
因此,在一些实施例中,所述显示请求还包括用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息,所述应用程序界面显示方法还包括:Therefore, in some embodiments, the display request further includes user information, device information, and subscription information, and the application program interface display method further includes:
从所述服务器中获取推荐应用列表;Obtaining a list of recommended applications from the server;
为所述推荐应用列表中的应用图标添加推荐标识;Adding a recommended logo to the application icon in the recommended application list;
在所述应用程序界面中显示带有推荐标识的应用图标以及所述下载链接。The application icon with the recommended logo and the download link are displayed in the application program interface.
其中,所述推荐应用列表为所述服务器根据所述用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息计算获得的应用列表,包括多个应用图标以及每个应用对应的下载链接。为了在应用程序界面中显示推荐应用,显示设备200可以在发送的显示请求中附带用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息,服务器300在接收到显示请求后,可以从显示请求中提取用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息,并根据提取的信息计算获得推荐应用列表,并将推荐应用列表反馈给显示设备200。The recommended application list is an application list calculated by the server according to the user information, device information, and subscription information, and includes multiple application icons and download links corresponding to each application. In order to display the recommended application in the application program interface, the display device 200 can attach user information, device information, and subscription information to the display request sent. After receiving the display request, the server 300 can extract the user information and device information from the display request. And subscribe to the information, calculate and obtain the recommended application list according to the extracted information, and feed the recommended application list back to the display device 200.
显示设备200在获取推荐应用列表后,可以对推荐应用的显示图案进行处理,使其区别于其他应用。例如,为推荐应用列表中的应用图标添加推荐标识。如图10所示,推荐标识可以添加在应用图标的右上角区域,并通过文字“推荐”进行标记。最后在应用程序界面中显示带有推荐标识的应用图标以及所述下载链接,以便用户点击该图标后,可以自动下载并安装推荐应用。After obtaining the recommended application list, the display device 200 may process the display pattern of the recommended application to distinguish it from other applications. For example, add a recommended logo to the application icon in the recommended application list. As shown in Figure 10, the recommendation logo can be added in the upper right corner area of the application icon and marked with the text "recommendation". Finally, the application icon with the recommended logo and the download link are displayed in the application program interface, so that the user can automatically download and install the recommended application after clicking the icon.
上述推荐应用是本地应用中未安装,且符合当前显示模式的一类应用,旨在为用户提 供更多符合当前场景的应用下载选择。例如,在教育模式下,推荐应用可以是应用商店中下载安装量较高的教育类应用。推荐应用也可以由服务器300根据用户的行为计算确定。例如,可以预先构建推荐模型,并以用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息作为推荐模型的输入,以应用名称和推荐度数值作为模型输出,从而获得推荐应用列表。The above recommended applications are a type of applications that are not installed in local applications and conform to the current display mode, and are designed to provide users with more application download options that conform to the current scenario. For example, in the education mode, the recommended application may be an education application with a high download and installation volume in the application store. The recommended application may also be calculated and determined by the server 300 according to the user's behavior. For example, a recommendation model can be constructed in advance, and user information, device information, and subscription information are used as the input of the recommendation model, and the application name and recommendation degree value are used as the model output, so as to obtain a list of recommended applications.
推荐应用列表中包括的应用数量可以是多个,并且多个应用可以按照预设的排列规则进行排序。例如,可以按照应用商店中的下载热度对推荐应用进行排序;也可以按照推荐模型输出的推荐度数值对推荐应用进行排序。通常,推荐度数值越高,则代表推荐应用越符合用户的行为特点。The number of applications included in the recommended application list can be multiple, and multiple applications can be sorted according to a preset arrangement rule. For example, the recommended applications can be sorted according to the popularity of downloads in the application store; the recommended applications can also be sorted according to the recommendation degree value output by the recommendation model. Generally, the higher the recommendation degree value, the more suitable the recommended application is to the user's behavior characteristics.
在显示推荐应用前,还可以对推荐应用的显示位置进行设定。可以将添加推荐标识的应用图标与可展示应用列表中的本地应用的应用图标混合排列。例如,通过控制器250运行应用混排算法对应用展示次序进行编排,在确定出9个可展示的应用后,确定出可以显示两个推荐应用,再将两个推荐应用与9个可展示应用进行混合排列,确定应用的展示顺序。Before the recommended application is displayed, the display position of the recommended application can also be set. The application icons to which the recommendation logo is added can be mixed and arranged with the application icons that can display the local applications in the application list. For example, the controller 250 runs the application shuffling algorithm to arrange the application display order. After determining 9 displayable applications, it is determined that two recommended applications can be displayed, and then the two recommended applications and 9 displayable applications are combined. Perform mixed arrangements to determine the display order of applications.
还可以在确定出9个可展示应用后,先在这9个可展示应用中进行一次顺序排列,并判断是否需要显示推荐应用。在不需要显示推荐应用的时候,例如关闭“猜你喜欢”按钮,则直接将9个可展示应用按照排列的顺序直接进行展示;而在需要显示推荐应用的时候,再计算确定出两个推荐应用,然后再对已经确定排列顺序的9个可展示应用和这两个新增的推荐应用再重新排列一次顺序。混合排列时,可以是随机混排,也可以是间隔排布,还可以是根据运营配置好的推荐展示位进行排布。After determining the 9 displayable applications, you can first arrange the 9 displayable applications in a sequence, and determine whether it is necessary to display recommended applications. When there is no need to display recommended applications, such as turning off the "Guess you like" button, the 9 displayable applications will be directly displayed in the order in which they are arranged; and when recommended applications need to be displayed, two recommendations will be determined by calculation Applications, and then re-arrange the order of the 9 displayable applications and the two newly-added recommended applications that have already been arranged. When the arrangement is mixed, it can be randomly mixed, or spaced, or arranged according to the recommended display positions that have been configured for operation.
在对可展示的本地应用图标与推荐应用图标进行混合排列后,控制器250还可以在应用程序界面中显示混合排列后的应用图标。为了在显示推荐应用的同时,不影响用户的交互操作,在应用程序界面中显示的应用数量不宜过多,并且推荐应用的显示位置不宜影响到用户对本地应用的选中操作。因此,在一些实施例中,还可以在特定的显示位置显示特定数量的推荐应用,即所述应用程序界面显示方法还包括:根据在所述应用程序界面中显示的所述本地应用的数量计算所述预设数量。以及,在所述推荐应用列表中,提取与所述预设数量相等的应用图标及其下载链接。示例性的:After the displayable local application icons and recommended application icons are mixedly arranged, the controller 250 may also display the mixedly arranged application icons in the application program interface. In order to display recommended applications without affecting the user's interactive operations, the number of applications displayed in the application program interface should not be too large, and the display position of the recommended applications should not affect the user's selection of local applications. Therefore, in some embodiments, a specific number of recommended applications may also be displayed in a specific display position, that is, the application program interface display method further includes: calculating according to the number of the local applications displayed in the application program interface The preset number. And, in the recommended application list, extracting application icons and their download links equal to the preset number. Exemplary:
根据在所述应用程序界面中显示的所述本地应用的数量计算推荐显示位;Calculating the recommended display position according to the number of the local applications displayed in the application program interface;
在所述推荐应用列表中,提取与所述推荐显示位数量相等的应用图标和下载链接;In the recommended application list, extract application icons and download links that are equal to the number of recommended display positions;
在所述应用程序界面中的推荐显示位上显示提取的应用图标和下载链接。The extracted application icon and download link are displayed on the recommended display position in the application program interface.
显示设备200可以提取能够在应用程序界面中显示的应用程序数量,再根据可显示的应用程序数量确定在应用程序界面中还能够容纳的应用图标数量,从而计算预设数量。再从推荐应用列表中提取对应数量的应用,从而将对应的应用图标和下载链接显示在应用程序界面中,并将对应的下载链接进行保存,从而在用户点击该推荐应用图标时,可以调用保存的下载链接数据,并访问下载链接。The display device 200 can extract the number of application programs that can be displayed in the application program interface, and then determine the number of application icons that can still be accommodated in the application program interface according to the number of displayable applications, thereby calculating the preset number. Then extract the corresponding number of applications from the recommended application list, so that the corresponding application icon and download link are displayed in the application program interface, and the corresponding download link is saved, so that when the user clicks the recommended application icon, the save can be called Download link data and visit the download link.
例如,教育模式下应用程序界面包含12个显示位,即最多可以显示12个应用图标。通过可展示应用列表进行筛选,确定有9个本地应用的包名信息在可展示应用列表中,则 可以计算获得推荐显示位为3个。同时,在推荐应用列表中提取前3个应用的图标和下载链接展示在对应的推荐显示位上。For example, in the education mode, the application program interface contains 12 display positions, that is, up to 12 application icons can be displayed. By filtering through the displayable application list, it is determined that the package name information of 9 local applications is in the displayable application list, and then 3 recommended display positions can be calculated. At the same time, the icons and download links of the first 3 applications are extracted from the recommended application list and displayed on the corresponding recommended display positions.
实际应用中,为了获得更好的提示效果,推荐显示位可以是应用程序列表中的某些特定位置。例如,如图33所示,12个显示位可以分成两行进行展示,将每行的第二个显示位作为推荐显示位,用于展示其中两个推荐应用,另一个推荐应用则可以按照本地应用的排列顺序,在本地应用之后进行显示。In actual applications, in order to obtain a better prompt effect, the recommended display position may be certain specific positions in the application list. For example, as shown in Figure 33, the 12 display positions can be divided into two rows for display. The second display position in each row is used as the recommended display position to display two of the recommended applications, and the other recommended application can be displayed in accordance with the local The order of the applications is displayed after the local application.
对于在应用程序界面中显示的推荐应用,由于其并未安装在显示设备200中,因此不能直接被启动运行,而是在用户点击该应用图标时,通过访问特定的下载链接,以下载对应的推荐应用,因此在一些实施例中,所述应用程序界面显示方法还包括:For the recommended application displayed in the application program interface, since it is not installed in the display device 200, it cannot be started and run directly. Instead, when the user clicks the application icon, the user can download the corresponding download link by visiting a specific download link. Recommended applications. Therefore, in some embodiments, the application program interface display method further includes:
接收对应应用列表中应用控件的选中指令;Receive the selection instruction of the application control in the corresponding application list;
在所述应用控件为本地应用时,响应于所述选中指令,打开对应的本地应用;When the application control is a local application, in response to the selection instruction, open the corresponding local application;
在所述应用控件为推荐应用时,响应于所述选中指令,访问所述推荐应用的下载链接,以获取所述推荐应用的安装文件。When the application control is a recommended application, in response to the selection instruction, access the download link of the recommended application to obtain the installation file of the recommended application.
在显示应用程序界面后,显示设备200还可以获取在应用列表中应用控件的选中指令。针对推荐应用的选中指令可以和针对本地应用的选中指令对应的交互方式相同,例如都是通过控制装置100将焦点光标定位在应用图标上以后,通过按下控制装置100上的“确定/OK”键进行输入,也可同样支持通过触控操作,如点击推荐应用图标,以及语音输入,如输入“打开××”,完成启动指令的输入。After displaying the application program interface, the display device 200 may also obtain a selection instruction of the application control in the application list. The selection instruction for the recommended application can be in the same interactive manner as the selection instruction for the local application, for example, after the focus cursor is positioned on the application icon by the control device 100, by pressing "OK/OK" on the control device 100 Key for input, also supports touch operation, such as clicking on the recommended application icon, and voice input, such as inputting "Open ××" to complete the input of the startup instruction.
在获取到选中指令后,显示设备200还可以根据当前应用控件的不同类型执行不同的动作。如果应用控件是本地应用,则响应于选中指令,直接打开对应的本地应用;如果应用控件是推荐应用,则响应于选中指令,访问推荐应用的下载链接。After obtaining the selected instruction, the display device 200 may also perform different actions according to different types of current application controls. If the application control is a local application, the corresponding local application is directly opened in response to the selected instruction; if the application control is a recommended application, the download link of the recommended application is accessed in response to the selected instruction.
在获取到启动指令后,显示设备200可以通过访问对应推荐应用的下载链接,获取安装文件。下载链接可以是由应用商店系统提供的URL链接。当显示设备200访问该链接时,可以自动从服务器300端获取应用安装文件。在获取安装文件后,显示设备200可以通过运行该安装文件,将推荐应用安装在显示设备200中。After obtaining the startup instruction, the display device 200 can obtain the installation file by accessing the download link of the corresponding recommended application. The download link may be a URL link provided by the application store system. When the display device 200 accesses the link, it can automatically obtain the application installation file from the server 300 side. After obtaining the installation file, the display device 200 can install the recommended application in the display device 200 by running the installation file.
待应用安装完成,显示设备200可以在应用程序界面中原推荐应用的显示位对应的位置上显示安装的应用。在推荐应用已经安装完成后,可以将推荐应用上的推荐标识去掉,以标志该应用为本地应用。After the application installation is completed, the display device 200 may display the installed application at a position corresponding to the display position of the original recommended application in the application program interface. After the recommended application has been installed, the recommended logo on the recommended application can be removed to mark the application as a local application.
由以上技术方案可知,上述实施例在显示的应用程序界面中,用户点击不含有推荐角标应用时,直接打开应用。用户在终端上点击含有推荐角标的应用时,则使用对应的下载地址URL进行下发应用,并提醒用户安装,安装成功之后,即打开此应用。通过在服务器300中获取的推荐应用列表,实现在应用程序界面显示推荐应用,有助于用户快速获取到符合当前显示模式的一类应用,从而便于丰富用户在当前模式下的资源选择,提升用户体验。It can be seen from the above technical solutions that, in the displayed application program interface in the above embodiment, when the user clicks an application that does not contain a recommended tag, the application is directly opened. When the user clicks on the application containing the recommended corner mark on the terminal, the corresponding download address URL is used to deliver the application, and the user is reminded to install it. After the installation is successful, the application is opened. Through the recommended application list obtained in the server 300, the recommended application is displayed on the application program interface, which helps the user to quickly obtain a type of application that conforms to the current display mode, thereby facilitating the enrichment of the user's resource selection in the current mode and improving the user Experience.
在一些实施例中,如图34所示,在响应于所述控制指令的步骤后,所述应用程序界面显示方法还包括:In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 34, after the step of responding to the control instruction, the application program interface display method further includes:
S201C:获取当前显示模式;S201C: Obtain the current display mode;
S202C:如果当前显示模式为标准模式,在所述应用程序界面中显示全部的所述本地应用;S202C: If the current display mode is the standard mode, display all the local applications in the application program interface;
S203C:如果当前显示模式为非标准模式,从服务器中获取可展示应用列表。S203C: If the current display mode is a non-standard mode, obtain a displayable application list from the server.
其中,所述显示模式为标准模式或非标准模式中的一种。实际应用中,标准模式即显示设备200的正常观看模式。在标准模式下显示应用程序界面时,可以不对应用程序界面中的应用展示情况进行筛选。而非标准模式则是根据预设操作方案设置的一种或多种显示模式。在非标准模式下,显示设备200的部分功能将受到限制,因此需要对应用程序界面中的应用展示情况进行筛选。Wherein, the display mode is one of a standard mode or a non-standard mode. In practical applications, the standard mode is the normal viewing mode of the display device 200. When the application program interface is displayed in the standard mode, the application display situation in the application program interface may not be filtered. The non-standard mode is one or more display modes set according to a preset operation scheme. In the non-standard mode, part of the functions of the display device 200 will be restricted, so it is necessary to filter the application display in the application program interface.
因此,在展示应用程序界面之前,还可以先获取当前显示模式,并根据当前显示模式类型确定应用程序界面中的应用显示方式。即如果当前显示模式为标准模式,则在应用程序界面中显示全部的本地应用。而如果当前显示模式为非标准模式,从服务器300中获取可展示应用列表,以便通过可展示应用列表对显示的应用进行筛选。Therefore, before displaying the application program interface, the current display mode can also be obtained first, and the application display mode in the application program interface can be determined according to the current display mode type. That is, if the current display mode is the standard mode, all local applications are displayed in the application program interface. If the current display mode is a non-standard mode, the displayable application list is obtained from the server 300, so as to filter the displayed applications through the displayable application list.
在一些实施例中,由于显示设备200可以在标准模式与非标准模式之间进行切换,而不同的显示模式下,应用程序界面的显示布局不同,因此在切换显示模式的同时,还需要按照指定的显示布局显示应用程序界面,所述应用程序界面显示方法还包括:In some embodiments, since the display device 200 can switch between the standard mode and the non-standard mode, and the display layout of the application interface is different in different display modes, it is necessary to switch the display mode at the same time as specified The display layout of the application program interface displays the application program interface, and the application program interface display method further includes:
接收用户输入的用于切换显示模式的切换指令;Receive a switching instruction input by the user for switching the display mode;
响应于所述切换指令,切换当前显示模式,包括:In response to the switching instruction, switching the current display mode includes:
如果当前显示模式为标准模式,切换显示模式为非标准模式,以及显示非标准模式下的应用程序界面;If the current display mode is the standard mode, switch the display mode to the non-standard mode, and display the application program interface in the non-standard mode;
如果当前显示模式为非标准模式,切换显示模式为标准模式,以及显示标准模式下的应用程序界面。If the current display mode is non-standard mode, switch the display mode to standard mode, and display the application program interface in standard mode.
切换指令可以由用户通过按下控制装置100上的“切换”按键输入、也可以通过点击控制主页上的模式切换控件输入、还可以通过语音“切换模式”输入。输入切换指令后,显示设备200可以响应于该切换指令,将当前显示模式切换为其他显示模式。The switching instruction can be input by the user by pressing the "switch" button on the control device 100, can also be input by clicking the mode switching control on the control homepage, or can be input by voice "switching mode". After the switching instruction is input, the display device 200 can switch the current display mode to another display mode in response to the switching instruction.
例如,如果当前显示模式为标准模式,则在接收到切换指令后,可以将标准模式切换至非标准模式,从而显示在非标准模式下的应用程序界面;如果当前显示模式为非标准模式,则在接收到切换指令后,可以将非标准模式切换至标准模式,从而显示在标准模式下的应用程序界面。For example, if the current display mode is the standard mode, after receiving the switching instruction, the standard mode can be switched to the non-standard mode to display the application interface in the non-standard mode; if the current display mode is the non-standard mode, then After receiving the switching instruction, the non-standard mode can be switched to the standard mode, thereby displaying the application program interface in the standard mode.
基于上述应用程序界面显示方法,本申请的部分实施例中还提供一种显示设备200,显示设备200包括:显示器、通信器以及控制器。其中,显示器275被配置为显示应用程序界面;通信器220被配置为与服务器300进行数据通信。Based on the above application program interface display method, some embodiments of the present application also provide a display device 200, the display device 200 includes: a display, a communicator, and a controller. Among them, the display 275 is configured to display an application program interface; the communicator 220 is configured to perform data communication with the server 300.
控制器250被配置为执行以下程序步骤:The controller 250 is configured to execute the following program steps:
获取用户输入的用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Obtain the control instruction input by the user for displaying the application program interface;
响应于所述控制指令,从服务器中获取可展示应用列表;In response to the control instruction, obtain a list of displayable applications from the server;
根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用;Match the local application in the displayable application list according to the package name information;
如果在所述可展示应用列表中匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,在所述应用程序界面中显示所述本地应用。If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, the local application is displayed in the application program interface.
对于上述显示设备200,控制器250可以在接收到用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令后,先判断当前显示设备的操作模式,如果是标准模式,响应于该控制指令,在应用程序界面中显示包含全部本地应用的应用列表;如果是非标准模式,则可以响应于该控制指令,通过通信器220向服务器300发送显示请求,服务器300在接收到显示请求后,可以反馈可展示应用列表,并通过网络连接传输可展示应用列表,以使控制器250利用通信器220再从而在服务器300获取可展示应用列表。For the above-mentioned display device 200, the controller 250 may first determine the operation mode of the current display device after receiving the control instruction for displaying the application program interface. If it is the standard mode, in response to the control instruction, display in the application program interface An application list containing all local applications; if it is in a non-standard mode, it can respond to the control instruction and send a display request to the server 300 through the communicator 220. After receiving the display request, the server 300 can feed back the displayable application list and pass The network connection transmits the displayable application list, so that the controller 250 uses the communicator 220 to obtain the displayable application list from the server 300.
获取可展示应用列表后,控制器250可以通过执行匹配应用程序,根据包名信息在可展示应用列表中逐一匹配显示设备200中安装的本地应用,从而在可展示应用列表中匹配到本地应用的包名信息时,在应用程序界面中显示对应的本地应用。After obtaining the displayable application list, the controller 250 may execute the matching application to match the local applications installed in the display device 200 one by one in the displayable application list according to the package name information, so as to match the local applications in the displayable application list. When the package name information is displayed, the corresponding local application is displayed in the application program interface.
基于上述显示设备200,本申请的部分实施例中还提供一种服务器300,用于在接收到显示设备200发送的显示请求时,反馈可展示应用列表以及推荐应用列表。所述服务器300包括:运营子系统、推荐子系统以及在线子系统。其中,运营子系统被配置为生成可展示应用列表;推荐子系统被配置为生成推荐应用列表;Based on the above-mentioned display device 200, some embodiments of the present application also provide a server 300 for feeding back a displayable application list and a recommended application list when receiving a display request sent by the display device 200. The server 300 includes: an operation subsystem, a recommendation subsystem, and an online subsystem. Among them, the operation subsystem is configured to generate a displayable application list; the recommendation subsystem is configured to generate a recommended application list;
在线子系统被配置为:The online subsystem is configured as:
接收显示设备发送的显示请求;Receive the display request sent by the display device;
响应于所述显示请求,从所述运营子系统获取可展示应用列表,以及从所述推荐子系统获取推荐应用列表;In response to the display request, obtaining a list of displayable applications from the operation subsystem, and obtaining a list of recommended applications from the recommendation subsystem;
向显示设备发送所述可展示应用列表和所述推荐应用列表。Send the displayable application list and the recommended application list to a display device.
在接收到显示设备200发送的显示请求后,在线子系统可以响应于显示请求,分别从运营子系统获取可展示应用列表以及从推荐子系统获取推荐应用列表,并向显示设备200发送可展示应用列表和推荐应用列表,以便显示设备200可以根据可展示应用列表和推荐应用列表筛选应用程序界面中的应用程序显示情况。After receiving the display request sent by the display device 200, the online subsystem may, in response to the display request, obtain the displayable application list from the operation subsystem and the recommended application list from the recommendation subsystem, respectively, and send the displayable application to the display device 200 A list and a recommended application list, so that the display device 200 can filter the application display conditions in the application interface according to the displayable application list and the recommended application list.
在一些实施例中,所述显示请求包括当前场景信息,所述在线子系统被进一步配置为:In some embodiments, the display request includes current scene information, and the online subsystem is further configured to:
解析所述显示请求,以获取所述当前场景信息;Parsing the display request to obtain the current scene information;
向所述运营子系统发送所述当前场景信息;Sending the current scene information to the operation subsystem;
接收所述运营子系统反馈的可展示应用列表,所述可展示应用列表为所述运营子系统根据所述当前场景信息进行筛选而生成的应用列表。Receive a displayable application list fed back by the operation subsystem, where the displayable application list is an application list generated by the operation subsystem through filtering according to the current scene information.
在一些实施例中,所述显示请求还包括用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息,所述在线子系统被进一步配置为:In some embodiments, the display request further includes user information, device information, and subscription information, and the online subsystem is further configured to:
解析所述显示请求,以获取所述用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息;Parsing the display request to obtain the user information, device information, and subscription information;
向所述推荐子系统发送所述用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息;Sending the user information, device information, and subscription information to the recommendation subsystem;
接收所述推荐子系统反馈的推荐应用列表,所述推荐应用列表为所述推荐子系统根据所述用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息计算生成的应用列表。A recommended application list fed back by the recommendation subsystem is received, where the recommended application list is an application list calculated and generated by the recommendation subsystem according to the user information, device information, and subscription information.
实际应用中,显示设备200的控制器250可以向服务器300发送显示请求,显示请求 中包括场景号(Sence Code:My App)、用户信息(customer Id)、设备信息(device Id)、订阅信息(subscribe Id)等。通信器220可以经过网关,将请求转发到在线子系统。在线子系统在接收到请求后,可以获取运营子系统数据库中的存储数据,并在存储数据中拿出包名(appPackageName)和下载地址URL,以获取可展示应用列表。In actual applications, the controller 250 of the display device 200 may send a display request to the server 300, and the display request includes the scene number (Sence Code: My App), user information (customer Id), device information (device Id), and subscription information ( subscribeId) etc. The communicator 220 may pass the gateway and forward the request to the online subsystem. After receiving the request, the online subsystem can obtain the storage data in the operation subsystem database, and take out the package name (appPackageName) and download address URL in the storage data to obtain a list of displayable applications.
同时,在线子系统还将customer Id,device Id,subscribe Id作为参数访问推荐子系统,使推荐子系统拿到请求参数,根据用户的行为计算出推荐的应用,返回推荐应用的包名(appPackageName)和下载地址URL。At the same time, the online subsystem also uses customerId, deviceId, and subscribeId as parameters to access the recommendation subsystem, so that the recommendation subsystem gets the request parameters, calculates the recommended application based on the user's behavior, and returns the package name of the recommended application (appPackageName) And download URL.
在线子系统再将推荐子系统获取到应用包名,增加字段isRecommend为true。将运营子系统获取到的应用包名,增加字段isRecommend为false,并将组合的数据下发给网关,以通过网关反馈到显示设备200中。The online subsystem obtains the application package name from the recommendation subsystem and adds the field isRecommend to true. Add the field isRecommend to false for the application package name obtained by the operation subsystem, and deliver the combined data to the gateway to feed back to the display device 200 through the gateway.
显示设备200在接收到反馈的数据后,遍历返回的数据,针对每一条数据进行处理,如果存在本地安装的应用的包名package与当前数据一致,则显示此应用在终端界面上。如果不存在本地安装的应用的包名package与当前数据一致,判断isRecommend是否为true,如果isRecommend为true,显示此应用到界面,并角标增加推荐;如果isRecommend为false,则不显示此应用到界面。After receiving the feedback data, the display device 200 traverses the returned data and processes each piece of data. If the package name package of a locally installed application is consistent with the current data, the application is displayed on the terminal interface. If there is no locally installed application whose package name package is consistent with the current data, judge whether isRecommend is true, if isRecommend is true, display this application to the interface, and add recommendations; if isRecommend is false, it will not display this application to interface.
由以上技术方案可知,本申请提供一种应用程序界面显示方法、显示设备200以及服务器300。所述方法可以应用在显示设备200中,以在用户输入用于显示应用程序界面的控制指令后,从服务器300中获取可展示应用列表,并根据包名信息在可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用。如果在可展示应用列表中匹配到本地应用的包名信息,在应用程序界面中显示本地应用。所述方法可以在教育模式下,实现对本地应用进行筛选,从而在教育模式下的应用程序界面中仅显示与教育模式相关的应用程序,便于用户启动运行教育类应用,解决传统智能电视需要较长时间才能够从众多应用程序中找到教育类应用程序的问题。It can be seen from the above technical solutions that the present application provides an application program interface display method, display device 200, and server 300. The method can be applied to the display device 200 to obtain the displayable application list from the server 300 after the user inputs a control instruction for displaying the application program interface, and match the local application in the displayable application list according to the package name information . If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, the local application is displayed in the application program interface. The method can realize filtering of local applications in the education mode, so that only the applications related to the education mode are displayed in the application program interface in the education mode, which is convenient for users to start and run educational applications, and solves the needs of traditional smart TVs. It took a long time to find the problems of educational applications in many applications.
在开机导航完成后,用户可以在显示是模式选择画面中选中标准模式选项,即通过控制装置“左”键,将焦点标志切换至标准模式选项上,此时模式选择画面的背景可以转变为标准模式对应图案和说明文字,再通过控制装置“确定/OK”键选定标准模式选项,以进入标准模式。After the boot navigation is completed, the user can select the standard mode option in the display mode selection screen, that is, switch the focus mark to the standard mode option through the "left" key of the control device, and the background of the mode selection screen can be changed to the standard mode. The mode corresponds to the pattern and explanatory text, and then the standard mode option is selected through the control device "OK/OK" key to enter the standard mode.
进入标准模式后,显示设备上会弹出标准模式对应的控制主页,在标准模式主页中可以包括多个显示区域,如Header区、切换区和内容区。After entering the standard mode, the control homepage corresponding to the standard mode will pop up on the display device. The standard mode homepage can include multiple display areas, such as the Header area, the switching area, and the content area.
如图23所示,Header区可以设置在整个显示画面的最顶部,包括多种功能控件,例如:“搜索”、“会员”、“消息”、“终端连接状态”、“网络连接状态”、“天气”、“时间”等。各控件可以在点击后弹出现实对应的界面。例如,用户点击“消息”控件时,可以弹出消息界面,在消息界面中可以展示服务器发布或应用推送的各种消息,形成消息列表。并且,每个消息包括已读/未读两种状态。当消息列表中存在未读消息时,可以在“消息”控件上添加提示图案。As shown in Figure 23, the Header area can be set at the top of the entire display screen, including a variety of functional controls, such as: "search", "member", "message", "terminal connection status", "network connection status", "Weather", "time", etc. Each control can pop up the actual corresponding interface after clicking. For example, when the user clicks the "message" control, a message interface can pop up, and various messages published by the server or pushed by the application can be displayed in the message interface to form a message list. And, each message includes two states: read/unread. When there are unread messages in the message list, you can add prompt patterns on the "message" control.
通知消息的补发Reissue of notification message
在一些实施例中,课程通知的消息是服务器下发给显示设备的,但有时会出现学院定 制课程之前服务器已经完成了课程通知消息的发送,为此发明人设计了一种消息补发的机制。示例性的。定时任务执行完成后,记录完成时间。如果有用户购买,BOS会通过kafka通知在线子系统,在线子系统查询该课程下是否有符合条件的课时,课时开始时间<(上次上课提醒消息通知定时任务执行时间+24小时+30分钟)&&课时结束时间>当前时间;如果有,则推送上课消息。没有就不进行推送。其执行的逻辑如图27所示。In some embodiments, the course notification message is sent by the server to the display device, but sometimes it appears that the server has completed sending the course notification message before the college customizes the course. For this reason, the inventor designed a message reissue mechanism. . Exemplary. After the timing task is completed, record the completion time. If a user purchases, BOS will notify the online subsystem through kafka, and the online subsystem will query whether there are eligible class hours under the course, and the class start time <(last class reminder message to notify the timing task execution time + 24 hours + 30 minutes) &&Class end time> current time; if there is, the class message will be pushed. If there is no push, it will not be pushed. The logic of its execution is shown in Figure 27.
本申请提供的消息补发方法可应用于服务器,所述服务器用于为显示设备提供多种服务。通常,显示设备可以向服务器发送多种请求,服务器则可以根据显示设备发送的请求反馈对应的数据。推送消息是由服务器统一发送给多个不同的显示设备的一种数据,通常用来传递某些提示信息,例如媒资开播预告、系统提示等。其中,所述显示设备是指具有界面显示功能的设备,如智能电视等。The message reissue method provided in this application can be applied to a server, and the server is used to provide a variety of services for the display device. Generally, the display device can send various requests to the server, and the server can feed back corresponding data according to the request sent by the display device. A push message is a type of data uniformly sent by the server to multiple different display devices, and is usually used to transmit certain prompt information, such as media asset launch announcements, system prompts, and so on. Wherein, the display device refers to a device with an interface display function, such as a smart TV.
基于上述显示设备200,服务器400可以通过结合不同的应用场景,向显示设备200推送消息。显示设备200则可以对服务器400推送的消息进行显示。为了显示推送的消息,显示设备200的控制器250可以根据接收到的消息生成消息画面,并控制显示器275显示消息画面。Based on the above-mentioned display device 200, the server 400 can push messages to the display device 200 by combining different application scenarios. The display device 200 can display the message pushed by the server 400. In order to display the pushed message, the controller 250 of the display device 200 may generate a message screen according to the received message, and control the display 275 to display the message screen.
显示设备200还可以根据当前使用场景和具体的消息内容或类型调整消息画面的显示方式。例如,显示设备200在控制主页、教育模式等使用场景时,推送消息可以是弹出式消息框,在显示画面的顶部或底部进行展示,并且在展示预设时间后自动消失,以避免对用户观看体验造成影响。当有多个推送消息时,各个消息画面还可以按照设定的排布方式进行排列。例如,如图28所示,可以按照接收到推送消息的先后顺序,在显示画面自上而下依次显示多个消息框。The display device 200 can also adjust the display mode of the message screen according to the current usage scenario and the specific message content or type. For example, when the display device 200 controls usage scenarios such as homepage, education mode, etc., the push message may be a pop-up message box, displayed at the top or bottom of the display screen, and automatically disappear after a preset time of display to avoid viewing the user The experience makes an impact. When there are multiple push messages, each message screen can also be arranged according to the set arrangement. For example, as shown in FIG. 28, multiple message boxes may be displayed sequentially from top to bottom on the display screen according to the order in which the push messages are received.
在一些实施例中,还可以根据显示设备200操作系统的消息收发方式,设置用于显示消息画面的消息界面。在消息界面中,可以对显示设备200在一定时间内接收的推送消息进行显示,以便于对消息进行统一管理。消息可以包括已读和未读状态,在消息界面中可以分别对已读和未读的消息进行显示。In some embodiments, a message interface for displaying a message screen can also be set according to the message sending and receiving mode of the operating system of the display device 200. In the message interface, the push messages received by the display device 200 within a certain period of time can be displayed, so as to facilitate unified management of the messages. Messages can include read and unread status, and read and unread messages can be displayed in the message interface respectively.
为了呈现消息界面,在显示设备200的操作系统部分界面上可以设置有统一的消息入口控件。例如,在控制主页的顶部状态栏中设有消息入口控件,当用户执行交互动作点击该消息入口控件后,可以跳转至消息界面。In order to present the message interface, a unified message entry control may be provided on the part of the interface of the operating system of the display device 200. For example, there is a message entry control in the top status bar of the control homepage. When the user performs an interactive action and clicks on the message entry control, the user can jump to the message interface.
在一些实施例中,推送消息可以包括多种类型,例如系统消息、第三方消息以及推广消息等。不同类型的消息可以在不同的情况下由服务器400完成推送。例如,系统消息可以由服务器400统一为各个终端进行推送,用于展示系统层面的通知内容,包括固件更新、补丁升级、公告通知等。第三方消息通常是由显示设备200中安装的应用程序的第三方服务器生成,并由第三方服务器直接向显示设备200推送,或者由第三方服务器先发送给服务器400,再通过服务器400统一推送给显示设备200。推广消息是服务器400根据用户的使用数据生成,如通过统计用户经常运行的应用程序等数据推算出的应用推荐消息等。推广消息同样通过服务器400推送给显示设备200,通常包括应用推荐、广告、用户自定义服务等消息内容。In some embodiments, push messages may include multiple types, such as system messages, third-party messages, and promotional messages. Different types of messages can be pushed by the server 400 in different situations. For example, system messages can be uniformly pushed by the server 400 for each terminal, and used to display system-level notification content, including firmware updates, patch upgrades, announcement notifications, and so on. The third-party message is usually generated by a third-party server of the application installed in the display device 200, and is directly pushed by the third-party server to the display device 200, or sent by the third-party server to the server 400 first, and then uniformly pushed to the server 400 through the server 400. Display device 200. The promotion message is generated by the server 400 according to the user's usage data, such as an application recommendation message calculated by counting data such as applications frequently run by the user. Promotion messages are also pushed to the display device 200 through the server 400, and usually include message content such as application recommendations, advertisements, and user-defined services.
推送消息的显示形式还可以根据具体的消息内容进行调整。例如,对于系统消息,可以采用弹出式消息,以减少用户错过重要消息;对于第三方应用消息或推广类消息,则可以采用消息界面的方式进行显示,以减少消息推送频率,避免显示消息时对用户观看体验的影响。The display form of the push message can also be adjusted according to the specific message content. For example, for system messages, pop-up messages can be used to reduce users’ missed important messages; for third-party application messages or promotional messages, they can be displayed in the form of message interfaces to reduce the frequency of message pushes and avoid distracting messages when displaying messages. The impact of user viewing experience.
本申请的部分实施例中,推送消息具有时限性,即部分提示类消息可以在具体的一个时间完成推送。实际应用中,可以通过定时任务触发消息推送。例如,定时任务检查24小时后的半小时内上课的课时,然后发出消息通知,达到提前24小时提醒用户上课的效果。In some embodiments of the present application, the push message has a time limit, that is, some prompt messages can be pushed in a specific time. In actual applications, the message push can be triggered by a timing task. For example, a timed task checks the class hours within half an hour after 24 hours, and then sends out a message notification, achieving the effect of reminding the user to attend the class 24 hours in advance.
由于触发时间的影响,这种定时任务的推送方式会出现漏发消息的情况。例如,定时任务推送上课消息,仅限于对在24小时之前已购买该课程的用户进行推送,对于在定时任务处理过后再购买该课时的用户不会再收到提醒,漏发上课消息。Due to the influence of the trigger time, this type of timing task push method may miss messages. For example, the timed task pushes the class message only to users who have purchased the course 24 hours ago. Users who purchase the class after the timed task is processed will no longer receive reminders and miss the class message.
为了缓解定时任务方式漏发消息的问题,本申请提供一种消息补发方法,所述消息补发方法包括以下步骤:In order to alleviate the problem of missing messages in a timed task mode, the present application provides a method for re-sending a message. The method for re-sending a message includes the following steps:
获取用户购买通知。所述用户购买通知包括用户信息以及媒资ID。Get notifications of user purchases. The user purchase notification includes user information and media asset ID.
根据所述用户信息查询预推送媒资。在服务器400中可以内置有专门用于处理媒资数据及相关内容数据的内容系统(模块)。媒资数据可以存储在服务器400的内容系统、或者存储在内容系统相关联的数据库中。当服务器400获取用户购买通知后,可以通过提取用户购买通知中的用户信息,从而通过内容系统查询预推送媒资。Query the pre-push media assets according to the user information. A content system (module) dedicated to processing media asset data and related content data may be built in the server 400. The media asset data may be stored in the content system of the server 400 or in a database associated with the content system. After the server 400 obtains the user purchase notification, the user information in the user purchase notification may be extracted to query the pre-push media assets through the content system.
根据所述预推送媒资的媒资ID提取推送消息。Extract the push message according to the media asset ID of the pre-push media asset.
将所述推送消息发送至所述用户信息对应的显示设备。Sending the push message to a display device corresponding to the user information.
基于上述预设判断周期,在一些实施例中,获取用户购买通知的步骤前,所述方法还包括:Based on the foregoing predetermined judgment period, in some embodiments, before the step of obtaining a user purchase notification, the method further includes:
获取记录的每次推送任务的开始时间、完成时间和执行时间;Obtain the recorded start time, completion time and execution time of each push task;
计算推送任务的开始时间与前一次推送任务执行时间的时间间隔,生成定时推送周期;Calculate the time interval between the start time of the push task and the execution time of the previous push task, and generate a regular push cycle;
计算推送任务的开始时间与完成时间的时间间隔,生成处理周期。Calculate the time interval between the start time and the completion time of the push task, and generate a processing cycle.
在一些实施例中,根据所述用户信息查询预推送媒资的步骤,包括:In some embodiments, the step of querying pre-push media assets according to the user information includes:
获取所述预设判断周期和当前时间;Acquiring the preset judgment period and the current time;
逐一对比媒资开播时间与所述预设判断周期;Compare the media asset start time and the preset judgment period one by one;
如果所述媒资开播时间在所述预设判断周期内,对比媒资结束时间与当前时间;If the media asset start time is within the preset judgment period, compare the media asset end time with the current time;
如果所述媒资结束时间晚于当前时间,标记媒资为预推送媒资。If the end time of the media asset is later than the current time, mark the media asset as a pre-push media asset.
在一些实施例中,消息补发的逻辑可以参照2020年*月*日申请的,申请号为:申请名称为***的中国专利。In some embodiments, the logic of message reissuance can refer to the application filed on *month*, 2020, and the application number is: the Chinese patent application named ***.
内容区可以占据显示画面的大部分区域,包括中部和底部,以便显示资源卡片、设置功能卡片等内容。点击不同的卡片可以执行不同的功能。例如,在内容区内可以显示观看历史、我的收藏等功能卡片,以及由推荐资源的封面组成的资源卡片等。还可以设置不同的视频归类卡片,在视频归类卡片中,可以包括多个同种类型的视频资源。例如,动画屋、 英语角、绘本馆、听世界、故事会、科学馆等。当内容区所要显示的内容较多时,还可以通过滚动卷轴的方式对内容进行显示。The content area can occupy most of the area of the display screen, including the middle and bottom, so as to display resource cards, setting function cards and other content. Click on different cards to perform different functions. For example, function cards such as viewing history, my favorites, and resource cards composed of the cover of recommended resources can be displayed in the content area. You can also set up different video classification cards. In the video classification card, you can include multiple video resources of the same type. For example, animation house, English corner, picture book library, listening to the world, story meeting, science museum, etc. When there is a lot of content to be displayed in the content area, the content can also be displayed by scrolling the reel.
切换区中可以设置多个指示不同功能页面的控件,例如:“我的”、“频道”、“影视”、“VIP”、“疫情”、“体育”、“商城”、“游戏”、“应用”、“发现”等。不同的控件可以在被选中后使内容区显示不同的内容。例如,在“影视”对应的控件下,内容区显示推荐资源卡片、观看历史等内容。Multiple controls indicating different function pages can be set in the switching area, such as: "my", "channel", "movie", "VIP", "epidemic", "sports", "mall", "game", " "Apply", "Discover", etc. Different controls can display different content in the content area after being selected. For example, under the control corresponding to "Movies", the content area displays recommended resource cards, viewing history and other content.
不同于教育模式下的控制主页,在标准模式下,可以将切换区设置在Header区与内容区之间,即设置在Header区的下方,内容区的上方,从而通过选择切换区内不同的控件,切换内容区中显示的内容。由于标准模式下,切换区内的控件点击频率要高于教育模式,因此,将切换区设置在Header区与内容区之间可以便于用户进行操作。并且在进入标准模式主页时,焦点标志设置在切换区中,以便用户可以直接通过控制装置上的“上”按键进入Header区执行操作;直接通过遥控器上的“下”按键进入内容区执行操作;通过控制装置上的“左”“右”按键,在多个控件之间进行切换。Different from the control homepage in education mode, in standard mode, you can set the switching area between the header area and the content area, that is, set it below the header area and above the content area, so as to switch between different controls in the area To switch the content displayed in the content area. In the standard mode, the frequency of clicks on the controls in the switching area is higher than that in the education mode. Therefore, setting the switching area between the Header area and the content area can facilitate user operations. And when entering the standard mode homepage, the focus mark is set in the switching area, so that the user can directly enter the Header area through the "up" button on the control device to perform operations; directly enter the content area through the "down" button on the remote control to perform operations ; Use the "left" and "right" buttons on the control device to switch between multiple controls.
需要说明的是,对于支持触控操作的显示设备,还可以在教育模式主页和标准模式主页上通过触控进行左右方向滑动,实现对不同频道进行切换。例如,如图24所示,在教育模式下默认将焦点标志设置在“我的”频道,则在屏幕上执行从右向左滑动时,将焦点标志切换至“同步课”频道。It should be noted that for display devices that support touch operation, you can also slide left and right through touch on the education mode homepage and the standard mode homepage to switch between different channels. For example, as shown in Figure 24, the focus flag is set to the "My" channel by default in the education mode, and when sliding from right to left on the screen, the focus flag is switched to the "Synchronized Lesson" channel.
还可以在首次进入主页界面时,显示操作提示,例如可依序显示滑动、返回、五指触控、边界操作、模式切换等操作的提示。显示提示的同时,并不影响用户的正常操作,并且提示不会随着用户的操作消失,直至用户执行提示内容对应的操作交互时,显示的提示消失,并显示下一个提示。显然,实际应用中可以手动关闭提示,以避免提示画面对用户操作的影响。It is also possible to display operation prompts when entering the homepage interface for the first time, for example, prompts for operations such as sliding, returning, five-finger touch, boundary operation, and mode switching can be displayed in sequence. While displaying the prompt, it does not affect the user's normal operation, and the prompt will not disappear with the user's operation until the user performs the operation interaction corresponding to the prompt content, the displayed prompt disappears, and the next prompt is displayed. Obviously, the prompt can be turned off manually in practical applications to avoid the effect of the prompt screen on user operations.
在展示操作提示时,和移动端提示信息占用全屏的操作不同的是,电视的界面中包含很多空间,提示仅占据一小片位置,此时用户如果操作提示对应区域(利于一小块包含提示信息的区域)下的控件,则控件不响应,操作提示的展示进行响应(例如切换,取消等)。此时用户如果操作提示对应区域(利于一小块包含提示信息的区域)之外的控件,则控件进行响应并取消操作提示。When the operation prompt is displayed, the difference between the mobile terminal prompt information and the full-screen operation is that the TV interface contains a lot of space, and the prompt only occupies a small area. At this time, if the user operates the prompt corresponding area (which is conducive to a small area that contains the prompt information) The control under the area), the control does not respond, and the display of the operation prompt responds (such as switching, canceling, etc.). At this time, if the user operates a control outside the prompt corresponding area (a small area containing prompt information), the control responds and cancels the operation prompt.
在一些实施例中接收到触控操作后,判断触控操作的位置,如果该位置位于操作提示对应区域(利于一小块包含提示信息的区域)则令执行操作提示的进程进行响应,如果位置在操作提示对应区域(利于一小块包含提示信息的区域)之外则令展示底层界面的进程进行响应。In some embodiments, after the touch operation is received, the position of the touch operation is determined. If the position is located in the corresponding area of the operation prompt (which is beneficial to a small area containing the prompt information), the process of executing the operation prompt is made to respond, if the position is Outside of the operation prompt corresponding area (a small area containing prompt information), the process of displaying the underlying interface is made to respond.
用户在内容区选定任一资源卡片时,可以弹出播放界面,对选定的资源进行播放,播放界面可以在显示设备进行全屏播放。播放界面下,可以通过按下遥控器的“确定/OK”键或触控点击播放画面,则可以弹出快速操作按钮,包括播放/暂停按钮、进度条、选集、调节清晰度等。When the user selects any resource card in the content area, the playback interface can pop up to play the selected resource, and the playback interface can be played in full screen on the display device. In the playback interface, you can press the "OK/OK" button on the remote control or touch the playback screen to pop up quick operation buttons, including the play/pause button, progress bar, selection, and sharpness adjustment.
相应地,用户可以通过点击播放/暂停按钮控制视频播放/暂停;点击进度条上的任意 位置,可以将播放进度调整至点击的位置继续进行播放;点击“选集”按钮可以弹出播放清单,以供用户进行选择;点击“清晰度”按钮可以调出清晰度调节菜单。Correspondingly, the user can control the video playback/pause by clicking the play/pause button; click any position on the progress bar to adjust the playback progress to the clicked position to continue playing; click the "selection" button to pop up the playlist for The user makes a choice; click the "Sharpness" button to bring up the sharpness adjustment menu.
另外,在弹出快速操作按钮后的预设时间内,如果用户没有输入其他交互命令,或者用户再次单击播放画面,则隐藏快速操作按钮。In addition, within the preset time after the quick operation button pops up, if the user does not input other interactive commands, or the user clicks the play screen again, the quick operation button is hidden.
对于播放界面的触控操作,还可以包括其他交互方式。例如,按住进度条拖拽点滑动,或者在屏幕任意位置按住进行左右方向的操作,可以实现快进/快退操作。操作过程中,拖拽距离可与快进时长相关,例如手指在视频上横向滑动1920p像素,则快进时长为总时长的20%。为了便于查看快进速度,在拖拽的过程中可以对进度条进行同步显示。For the touch operation of the playback interface, other interaction methods may also be included. For example, press and hold the progress bar and drag the point to slide, or press and hold anywhere on the screen to perform left and right operations to achieve fast forward/rewind operations. During the operation, the drag distance can be related to the fast-forward duration. For example, when a finger slides 1920p pixels horizontally on the video, the fast-forward duration is 20% of the total duration. In order to check the fast forward speed easily, the progress bar can be displayed synchronously during the dragging process.
又例如,可以通过双击屏幕实现暂停/播放视频;可以通过从屏幕底部上滑或者通过按下遥控器的“下”键,调出选集浮窗。For another example, the video can be paused/played by double-clicking the screen; the selection floating window can be called up by sliding up from the bottom of the screen or by pressing the "down" key of the remote control.
为了从标准模式切换到教育模式,如图23所示,在标准模式主页的Header区,还可以增加“教育模式”控件,当用户点击该控件时,可以控制显示设备从标准模式切换至教育模式。In order to switch from standard mode to education mode, as shown in Figure 23, in the Header area of the standard mode homepage, you can also add an "education mode" control. When the user clicks on this control, you can control the display device to switch from standard mode to education mode. .
同样,在切换至教育模式后,显示设备可以先显示密码界面。用户通过密码界面中输入进入密码,显示设备或者服务器可以对输入的进入密码进行验证,如果验证通过则可以进入教育模式。此时,显示设备可以读取登录的账号信息,并将账号信息作为主页请求发送给服务器。服务器在接收到主页请求后,可以根据账号信息确定用户已选择的年级选项,从而生成主页配置文件,并将主页配置文件发送给显示设备。显示设备再根据接收到主页配置文件,调整显示教育模式主页中的内容。Similarly, after switching to the education mode, the display device can first display the password interface. The user enters the entry password through the password interface, the display device or the server can verify the entered entry password, and if the verification is passed, the education mode can be entered. At this time, the display device can read the logged-in account information, and send the account information as a homepage request to the server. After receiving the homepage request, the server can determine the grade option that the user has selected according to the account information, thereby generating a homepage configuration file, and sending the homepage configuration file to the display device. The display device adjusts and displays the content of the education mode homepage according to the received homepage configuration file.
如果用户为首次进入教育模式,还可以在进入密码验证通过后,显示年级选择界面,供用户进行选择。用户通过年级选择界面选择年级选项后,显示设备根据所选择的年级选项,向服务器发送主页请求,并按照上述主页请求方式获取主页配置文件,以显示对应的教育模式主页。If the user enters the education mode for the first time, he can also display the grade selection interface for the user to choose after the password verification is passed. After the user selects the grade option through the grade selection interface, the display device sends a homepage request to the server according to the selected grade option, and obtains the homepage configuration file according to the above-mentioned homepage request method to display the corresponding education mode homepage.
需要说明的是,本申请提供的技术方案中,还可以通过其他方式从标准模式切换至教育模式。包括:It should be noted that in the technical solution provided by this application, it is also possible to switch from the standard mode to the education mode in other ways. include:
通过智能语音系统实现切换。用户可以在启动智能语音系统后,输入语音指令,如“教育模式”、“切换到教育模式”、“返回教育主页”等,显示设备在接收到上述语音输入后,可以直接执行切换命令,从标准模式切换至教育模式。Realize switching through intelligent voice system. After starting the intelligent voice system, the user can input voice commands, such as "education mode", "switch to education mode", "return to education homepage", etc. The display device can directly execute the switching command after receiving the above voice input, from The standard mode is switched to the education mode.
通过全局菜单实现切换。用户可以通过预设的手势操作调出全局菜单,例如在显示器上使用五指滑动,并在全局菜单中点击教育模式,使显示设备切换至教育模式。其中,全局菜单是操作系统中统一设置的一种交互方法,如图25所示,全局菜单可以在呼出后显示在所有画面内容之上,其中包括多个全局操作控件,例如,“返回”、“模式切换”、“演示”、“截屏”、“批注”、“返回主页”等。其中,模式切换选项可以在不同的操作模式下显示不同的描述内容。例如,在标准模式下,“模式切换”控件位置显示“教育模式”,以便在点击后切换至教育模式;在教育模式下,“模式切换”控件位置显示“标准模式”,从而在点击后切换至标准模式。Switch through the global menu. The user can call up the global menu through preset gesture operations, such as swiping with five fingers on the display and tapping the education mode in the global menu to switch the display device to the education mode. Among them, the global menu is an interactive method that is uniformly set in the operating system. As shown in Figure 25, the global menu can be displayed on all screen content after calling out, including multiple global operation controls, such as "return", "Mode switch", "Demo", "Screenshot", "Annotation", "Return to home page", etc. Among them, the mode switching option can display different description content in different operation modes. For example, in standard mode, the "mode switch" control position displays "education mode" to switch to education mode after clicking; in education mode, the "mode switch" control position displays "standard mode" to switch after clicking To standard mode.
通过控制装置上的指定按键实现。用户可以通过按压控制装置上的“模式切换”或者“教育模式”按键,控制显示设备切换至对应的模式。其中,“模式切换”按键可以在不同的模式下拥有不同的功能,例如,在标准模式下,按下“模式切换”键可以切换至教育模式,而在教育模式下,按下“模式切换”键可以切换至标准模式。This is achieved through the designated buttons on the control device. The user can control the display device to switch to the corresponding mode by pressing the "mode switch" or "education mode" button on the control device. Among them, the "mode switch" button can have different functions in different modes. For example, in the standard mode, press the "mode switch" button to switch to the education mode, and in the education mode, press the "mode switch" Key to switch to standard mode.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可在一些推荐界面如首页展示一些专题等供用户观看,专题可为一个媒资合集,其中可包含多个具有相同或相似主题的媒资,用户可将一个或多个专题进行收藏,便于日后观看。In some embodiments, the display device may display some topics on some recommended interfaces, such as the homepage, for users to watch. The topic may be a collection of media assets, which may include multiple media assets with the same or similar themes. The user may add one or Collect multiple topics for easy viewing in the future.
在一些实施例中,用户可收藏多个不同类型的专题,例如:某个演员的影视专题1、某个综艺的精彩片段专题2、幼小衔接课程专题3,其中,专题1包括5部类型为影视的电视剧媒资,专题2包括10个类型为综艺的片花媒资,专题3包括4个类型为教育的课程媒资。显示设备可设置收藏界面展示用户收藏的专题,然而,当用户收藏的专题较多时,这些收藏的专题如果直接混编在一起,将会使收藏界面看起来较为杂乱,用户查找某个想要观看的专题时往往需要花费较多时间。In some embodiments, the user can collect a number of different types of topics, such as: a certain actor's film and television topic 1, a certain variety show highlights topic 2, a small bridging course topic 3, where the topic 1 includes 5 types: For film and television drama media resources, Topic 2 includes 10 types of film media resources for variety shows, and Topic 3 includes 4 types of education media resources. The display device can set the collection interface to display the user's favorite topics. However, when the user has many favorite topics, if these favorite topics are directly mixed together, the collection interface will look messy, and the user looks for a certain one they want to watch The topic often takes more time.
为解决上述问题,本申请设置了多种场景模式来展示专题,其中,一种场景模式可为标准模式,在该场景模式下,收藏界面可按照类型展示收藏的专题,便于用户按照类型查找专题;一种场景模式可为教育模式,在该场景模式下,推荐界面和收藏界面可只展示预设专题类型如教育类型的专题,使用户查找专题时不受其他类型专题的干扰。In order to solve the above problems, this application sets up multiple scene modes to display topics. One of the scene modes can be a standard mode. In this scene mode, the collection interface can display favorite topics by type, which is convenient for users to find topics by type. ; One scene mode can be an education mode. In this scene mode, the recommendation interface and the collection interface can only display preset topic types such as educational topics, so that users will not be interfered by other types of topics when searching for topics.
在一些实施例中,为便于对显示设备进行操作,显示设备的显示器可包括触摸屏,用户可通过触摸屏对显示设备进行触控,当然,用户还可通过其他方式对显示设备进行控制,例如,通过传统的控制装置如遥控器对显示设备进行控制,或通过向显示设备发出语音指令对显示设备进行控制。In some embodiments, in order to facilitate the operation of the display device, the display of the display device may include a touch screen, and the user can touch the display device through the touch screen. Of course, the user may also control the display device in other ways, for example, A traditional control device such as a remote controller controls the display device, or controls the display device by issuing a voice command to the display device.
设置有教育模式且具备触控功能的显示设备可称为教育触控电视,在一些实施例中,教育触控电视的场景模式包括标准模式和教育模式,其中,标准模式可为显示设备的第一场景模式,即默认模式,显示设备可在开机后默认进入该场景模式,标准模式还可称为普通模式,用于满足普通用户的观看需求,教育模式可为显示设备的第二场景模式,用于满足家长教育儿童的需求,不同的场景模式可以相互切换。A display device with an education mode and a touch function can be called an education touch TV. In some embodiments, the scene mode of the education touch TV includes a standard mode and an education mode. Among them, the standard mode can be the second display device. A scene mode, that is, the default mode. The display device can enter this scene mode by default after it is turned on. The standard mode can also be called the normal mode to meet the viewing needs of ordinary users. The education mode can be the second scene mode of the display device. To meet the needs of parents to educate their children, different scene modes can be switched with each other.
用户在教育触控电视上查找收藏专题时,显示设备的响应方法可参见图35,为根据一些实施例的用户收藏显示方法的流程示意图,如图35所示,该方法可包括如下步骤:When a user searches for a favorite topic on an educational touch TV, the response method of the display device can be seen in FIG. 35, which is a schematic flowchart of a user favorite display method according to some embodiments. As shown in FIG. 35, the method may include the following steps:
步骤S100D:接收用户输入的启动收藏界面的指令。Step S100D: Receive an instruction to start the favorite interface input by the user.
在一些实施例中,显示设备的首页可设置有收藏展示控件,用户可通过该控件输入启动收藏界面的指令,输入方式包括:在显示设备的触控屏上点击收藏展示控件,或通过遥控器选中收藏展示控件并确认,或通过语音指令触发收藏展示控件。In some embodiments, the homepage of the display device may be provided with a collection display control, through which the user can input an instruction to start the collection interface. The input method includes: clicking the collection display control on the touch screen of the display device, or through the remote control Select the favorite display control and confirm, or trigger the favorite display control by voice command.
步骤S110D:当所述显示设备处于第一场景模式下时,根据所述全部专题类型的收藏数据控制所述显示器显示所述收藏界面。Step S110D: When the display device is in the first scene mode, control the display to display the collection interface according to the collection data of all the topic types.
在一些实施例中,第一场景模式为标准模式,通常情况下,用户使用该模式的次数较多,收藏的专题可能也较多,为显示全面的专题收藏数据,显示设备可根据全部专题类型 的收藏数据控制所述显示器显示所述收藏界面,从而在收藏界面展示当前登录用户的收藏的全部专题。在一些实施例中,显示设备可按照专题类型展示用户收藏的专题,以方便用户查找专题。In some embodiments, the first scene mode is the standard mode. Generally, the user uses this mode more times and may also collect more topics. In order to display comprehensive thematic collection data, the display device can be based on all topic types. The collection data of, controls the display to display the collection interface, so that all the topics of the collection of the currently logged-in user are displayed on the collection interface. In some embodiments, the display device may display the topics that the user favorites according to topic types, so as to facilitate the user to find topics.
步骤S120D:当所述显示设备处于第二场景模式下时,根据所述预设专题类型的收藏数据控制所述显示器显示所述收藏界面。Step S120D: When the display device is in the second scene mode, control the display to display the collection interface according to the collection data of the preset theme type.
在一些实施例中,第二场景模式为教育模式,通常情况下,用户使用该模式时教育孩子的目的性较强,为避免用户查找专题时不受其他类型专题的干扰,显示设备可只展示预设专题类型的收藏数据,如教育专题类型的收藏数据,从而在收藏界面只展示当前登录用户收藏的教育专题。In some embodiments, the second scene mode is an education mode. Normally, the user has a strong purpose of educating children when using this mode. In order to prevent the user from being interfered by other types of topics when searching for topics, the display device may only display Preset the collection data of the topic type, such as the collection data of the education topic type, so that only the education topics collected by the currently logged-in user are displayed on the collection interface.
为对显示设备在不同场景模式下根据不同收藏数据展示收藏界面的原理进行说明,下面分别就标准模式和教育模式下用户与教育触控电视的交互进行说明。In order to explain the principle of the display device displaying the collection interface according to different collection data in different scene modes, the following describes the interaction between the user and the educational touch TV in the standard mode and the education mode.
在标准模式下,用户与教育触控电视的交互包括对专题进行操作时的交互。在一些实施例中,用户对专题的操作包括获取详情页、收藏该专题以及在收藏界面查找该专题。参见图36,为根据一些实施例的标准模式下用户与显示设备的交互方法的流程示意图,如图36所示,该交互方法可包括如下步骤:In the standard mode, the interaction between the user and the educational touch TV includes the interaction when operating on the topic. In some embodiments, the user's operations on the topic include obtaining a detail page, bookmarking the topic, and searching for the topic on the favorite interface. Refer to FIG. 36, which is a schematic flowchart of a user-display device interaction method in a standard mode according to some embodiments. As shown in FIG. 36, the interaction method may include the following steps:
步骤S101D:接收用户输入的专题详情指令,响应于所述专题详情指令,从服务器中获取所述专题详情指令对应专题的详情数据,以及所述专题详情指令对应专题的专题类型,根据所述详情数据控制所述显示器显示专题详情界面,并存储所述专题类型。Step S101D: Receive the topic detail instruction input by the user, and in response to the topic detail instruction, obtain the topic detail data of the topic corresponding to the topic detail instruction and the topic type of the topic corresponding to the topic detail instruction from the server, according to the details The data controls the display to display the topic details interface, and stores the topic type.
在一些实施例中,用户可在标准模式的首页输入专题详情指令。其中,首页的数据由用户进入首页时服务器下发到显示设备,服务器下发的数据可包括第一模式标识,如全部专题类型的productcode(产品代码)。In some embodiments, the user can input the topic details instruction on the home page of the standard mode. Among them, the data of the homepage is delivered by the server to the display device when the user enters the homepage, and the data delivered by the server may include the first mode identifier, such as productcodes of all topic types.
参见图37,为根据一些实施例的标准模式的首页示意图,如图37所示,标准模式的首页可展示导航栏和推荐位。导航栏可展示多个栏目控件,如“我的”、“频道”、“影视”、“VIP”、“疫情”、“体育”、“商城”、“游戏”、“应用”和“发现”。Refer to FIG. 37, which is a schematic diagram of the home page in the standard mode according to some embodiments. As shown in FIG. 37, the home page in the standard mode can display a navigation bar and recommended positions. The navigation bar can display multiple column controls, such as "my", "channel", "movie", "VIP", "epidemic", "sports", "mall", "game", "application" and "discovery" .
在一些实施例中,导航栏上方可设置有模式切换控件,在标准模式下,模式切换控件可显示为“标准模式”,用户可对模式切换控件进行触控,显示设备响应于用户对模式切换控件的触控信号,将当前页面切换为教育模式的首页,用户还可通过遥控器遥控等方式对显示设备进行模式切换。在一些实施例中,模式切换控件响应于触控或遥控器触发时可弹出模式选择窗口,提供多种场景模式供用户选择。In some embodiments, a mode switching control can be provided above the navigation bar. In the standard mode, the mode switching control can be displayed as "standard mode", the user can touch the mode switching control, and the display device responds to the user's mode switching The touch signal of the control switches the current page to the home page of the education mode, and the user can also switch the mode of the display device by means of remote control, etc. In some embodiments, the mode switching control may pop up a mode selection window when triggered by a touch or a remote control, and provide multiple scene modes for the user to select.
在一些实施例中,推荐位可设置在导航栏下方,可展示一些推荐媒资,推荐媒资可包括一个媒资或一个专题,例如,推荐媒资可为:媒资1、媒资2、媒资3、媒资4、专题A、专题B、专题C和专题D。In some embodiments, the recommended position may be set under the navigation bar, and some recommended media assets may be displayed. The recommended media assets may include a media asset or a topic. For example, the recommended media asset may be: media asset 1, media asset 2, Media Assets 3, Media Assets 4, Topic A, Topic B, Topic C, and Topic D.
在一些实施例中,用户输入专题详情指令的方式可包括:在显示设备的触控屏上点击一个专题,或通过遥控器选中一个专题并确认,或通过语音指令指示显示设备打开一个专题。In some embodiments, the way for the user to input the topic details instruction may include: clicking a topic on the touch screen of the display device, or selecting and confirming a topic through the remote control, or instructing the display device to open a topic through a voice command.
在一些实施例中,显示设备的控制器可将触控屏接收到的某个专题显示区域的触控信 号作为专题详情指令,或将遥控器发送的对应某个专题显示区域的控制信号作为专题详情指令,或将语音指令中识别出的打开某个专题的命令作为专题详情指令。响应于专题详情指令,显示设备可获取专题详情指令对应专题的ID信息,根据专题的ID信息向服务器请求该专题的详情数据以及该专题的专题类型,将专题类型进行本地存储。In some embodiments, the controller of the display device may use the touch signal of a certain topic display area received by the touch screen as the topic detail instruction, or use the control signal corresponding to a certain topic display area sent by the remote control as the topic The detailed command, or the command to open a topic recognized in the voice command as the topic detailed command. In response to the topic detail instruction, the display device may obtain the ID information of the topic corresponding to the topic detail instruction, request the server for the detailed data of the topic and the topic type of the topic according to the topic ID information, and store the topic type locally.
在一些实施例中,显示设备根据专题的详情数据可生成如图38所示的专题详情界面。参见图38,该专题详情界面为专题A的详情页,在专题详情界面,可展示专题海报、专题说明、专题媒资和专题收藏控件,其中,专题收藏控件可位于专题详情页的右上角,当用户未收藏该专题时,专题收藏控件可显示“收藏”,从而提示用户可收藏该专题。专题海报可铺满专题详情界面,专题介绍可包括对该专题的文字说明,专题媒资的数量可包括多个,如媒资A1、媒资A2、媒资A3、媒资A4、媒资A5、媒资A6、媒资A7和媒资A8。In some embodiments, the display device may generate the theme details interface as shown in FIG. 38 according to the detailed data of the theme. Refer to Figure 38. The topic details interface is the details page of topic A. On the topic details interface, the topic posters, topic descriptions, topic media resources, and topic collection controls can be displayed. Among them, the topic collection controls can be located in the upper right corner of the topic details page. When the user has not favorited the topic, the topic favorite control can display "Favorite", thereby prompting the user that the topic can be favorited. The topic poster can be filled with the topic details interface, the topic introduction can include a text description of the topic, the number of the topic media assets can include multiple, such as media assets A1, media assets A2, media assets A3, media assets A4, media assets A5 , Media Asset A6, Media Asset A7 and Media Asset A8.
步骤S102D:接收用户在专题详情界面输入的专题收藏指令,响应于所述专题收藏指令,获取所述专题收藏指令对应专题的类型,向服务器发送包含所述专题类型的收藏请求,使所述服务器生成并存储包含所述专题类型的专题收藏数据。Step S102D: Receive the special topic collection instruction input by the user on the topic details interface, in response to the topic collection instruction, obtain the topic type corresponding to the topic collection instruction, and send a collection request containing the topic type to the server, so that the server Generate and store thematic collection data containing the thematic type.
在一些实施例中,用户可在专题详情界面输入专题收藏指令。用户输入专题收藏指令的方式可包括:在显示设备的触控屏上点击专题收藏控件,或通过遥控器选中专题收藏控件并确认,或通过语音指令触发专题收藏控件。In some embodiments, the user can input a special topic collection instruction on the topic details interface. The way for the user to input the special collection instruction may include: clicking the special collection control on the touch screen of the display device, or selecting and confirming the special collection control through the remote control, or triggering the special collection control through a voice command.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可响应于专题收藏指令,获取步骤S101中存储的专题类型,向服务器发送包含所述专题类型的收藏请求,使服务器生成并存储包含专题类型的专题收藏数据。服务器完成专题收藏数据的存储后,可向显示设备返回收藏成功的信号,显示设备根据该收藏成功的信号,将专题收藏控件刷新为显示“已收藏”,从而提示用户已收藏该专题。In some embodiments, the display device may, in response to the special theme collection instruction, obtain the theme type stored in step S101, and send a collection request including the theme type to the server, so that the server generates and stores the theme collection data including the theme type. After the server completes the storage of the special collection data, it can return a successful collection signal to the display device, and the display device refreshes the special collection control to display "favored" according to the successful collection signal, thereby prompting the user that the special topic has been favorited.
用户在收藏该专题后,可在专题详情界面点开其中一个媒资进行观看,也可返回至首页,继续查看其它媒资。当然,用户也可先在专题详情界面中点开其中一个或多个媒资进行观看后,再返回专题详情界面,输入专题收藏指令将该专题进行收藏。After bookmarking the topic, the user can click on one of the media assets to watch it on the topic details interface, or return to the home page to continue to view other media assets. Of course, the user can also click on one or more of the media assets in the topic details interface to watch, and then return to the topic details interface and enter the topic collection instruction to bookmark the topic.
步骤S103D:接收用户输入的启动收藏界面的指令,响应于所述启动收藏界面的指令,根据全部专题类型的收藏数据控制所述显示器显示收藏界面。Step S103D: Receive an instruction to start the collection interface input by the user, and in response to the instruction to start the collection interface, control the display to display the collection interface according to the collection data of all the topic types.
在一些实施例中,用户可从标准模式的首页触发“我的”栏目控件,进入“我的”栏目界面,“我的”栏目界面可设置有收藏展示控件,用户可通过该收藏展示控件输入启动收藏界面的指令。In some embodiments, the user can trigger the "My" column control from the homepage in the standard mode to enter the "My" column interface. The "My" column interface can be provided with a collection display control, and the user can input through the collection display control The instruction to start the favorite interface.
在一些实施例中,当所述显示设备处于第一场景模式下时,显示设备对启动收藏界面的指令的响应方法可参见图39,如图39所示,该响应方法可包括步骤S131D-S133D。In some embodiments, when the display device is in the first scene mode, the response method of the display device to the instruction to start the collection interface can be seen in FIG. 39. As shown in FIG. 39, the response method may include steps S131D-S133D. .
步骤S131D:当所述显示设备处于第一场景模式下时,所述控制器向所述服务器发送第一收藏展示指令,所述第一收藏指令用于从服务器中获取所述用户的全部专题类型的收藏数据。Step S131D: When the display device is in the first scene mode, the controller sends a first collection display instruction to the server, and the first collection instruction is used to obtain all the topic types of the user from the server Collection data.
在一些实施例中,当所述显示设备处于第一场景模式下时,显示设备可根据用户输入的启动收藏界面的指令,向服务器发送第一收藏展示指令。参见图40,为根据一些实施例 的第一收藏指令发送方法的流程示意图,如图40所示,该发送方法可包括步骤S1311D-S1313D。In some embodiments, when the display device is in the first scene mode, the display device may send the first collection display instruction to the server according to the instruction input by the user to start the collection interface. Refer to Fig. 40, which is a schematic flowchart of a first method for sending a collection instruction according to some embodiments. As shown in Fig. 40, the sending method may include steps S1311D-S1313D.
步骤S1311D:响应于所述启动收藏界面的指令,获取第一模式标识,所述第一模式标识是在所述显示设备加载所述第一场景模式的主页时从所述服务器获取到的。Step S1311D: In response to the instruction to start the collection interface, obtain a first mode identifier, the first mode identifier being obtained from the server when the display device loads the homepage of the first scene mode.
在一些实施例中,用户在进入第一场景模式的主页时,服务器会向显示设备下发媒资推荐数据,使显示设备根据媒资推荐数据生成主页。媒资推荐数据可包括第一模式标识,第一模式标识可包括全部专题类型的productcode,如productCode#影视、productCode#教育、productCode#K歌、productCode#演员。显示设备将第一模式标识进行存储,在用户在输入启动收藏界面的指令后,获取第一模式标识。In some embodiments, when the user enters the homepage of the first scene mode, the server will issue media asset recommendation data to the display device, so that the display device generates the homepage based on the media asset recommendation data. The media asset recommendation data may include a first mode identifier, and the first mode identifier may include productcodes of all topic types, such as productCode#电影, productCode#教育, productCode#K歌, productCode#Actor. The display device stores the first mode identifier, and obtains the first mode identifier after the user inputs an instruction to start the favorite interface.
步骤S1312D:根据所述第一模式标识,生成第一收藏展示指令,所述第一收藏展示指令包含所述第一模式标识。Step S1312D: Generate a first collection display instruction according to the first mode identifier, where the first collection display instruction includes the first mode identifier.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可根据获取到的第一模式标识,生成包括该第一模式标识的第一收藏指令。In some embodiments, the display device may generate a first collection instruction including the first mode identifier according to the acquired first mode identifier.
步骤S1313D:发送所述第一收藏展示指令给所述服务器。Step S1313D: Send the first collection display instruction to the server.
在一些实施例中,显示设备在生成第一收藏指令后,将第一收藏指令发送给服务器。In some embodiments, the display device sends the first favorite instruction to the server after generating the first favorite instruction.
步骤S132D:接收所述用户的全部专题类型的收藏数据。Step S132D: receiving collection data of all topic types of the user.
在一些实施例中,服务器接收到第一收藏指令后,从第一收藏指令中提取出第一模式标识,发送与第一模式标识对应的全部专题类型的收藏数据到显示设备。In some embodiments, after receiving the first favorite instruction, the server extracts the first mode identifier from the first favorite instruction, and sends the favorite data of all thematic types corresponding to the first mode identifier to the display device.
步骤S133D:根据所述全部专题类型的收藏数据控制所述显示器显示所述收藏界面。Step S133D: Control the display to display the collection interface according to the collection data of all the topic types.
在一些实施例中,显示设备的控制器根据全部专题类型的收藏数据生成收藏界面,并控制显示器显示该收藏界面,该收藏界面也可称为第一收藏界面。In some embodiments, the controller of the display device generates a collection interface according to the collection data of all thematic types, and controls the display to display the collection interface. The collection interface may also be referred to as the first collection interface.
参见图41,为根据一些实施例的第一收藏界面的示意图。如图41所示,第一收藏界面可为全部专题的收藏界面,设置有专题导航栏,专题导航栏可包括多个专题类型控件,如“影视”、“教育”、“K歌”、“演员”和“专题”,其中,每个专题类型控件响应于触发时可在第一收藏界面展示相应专题类型的收藏数据,便于用户按照专题类型查找收藏的专题,“专题”控件响应于触发时可在第一收藏界面展示全部专题类型的收藏数据,便于用户查看收藏的全部专题。在图41中,各专题类型控件响应于选中时即被触发,选中方式可包括用户在显示设备的触摸屏上触控专题类型控件,或者用户通过遥控器上的方向选择键选中专题类型控件。用户可通过切换选中的专题类型控件,获取不同类型的专题收藏数据。Refer to FIG. 41, which is a schematic diagram of a first collection interface according to some embodiments. As shown in Figure 41, the first collection interface can be a collection interface for all topics, with a topic navigation bar, which can include multiple topic type controls, such as "movie", "education", "K song", " Actors" and "Topics", where each topic type control can display the collection data of the corresponding topic type on the first collection interface in response to triggering, so that users can find favorite topics according to the topic type. The "topic" control responds to triggering. The collection data of all topic types can be displayed on the first collection interface, so that users can view all the topics in the collection. In FIG. 41, each topic type control is triggered when selected in response to selection. The selection method may include the user touching the topic type control on the touch screen of the display device, or the user selecting the topic type control through the direction selection key on the remote control. The user can obtain different types of thematic collection data by switching the selected thematic type controls.
为对显示设备对用户操作的响应方法做进一步描述,本申请实施例还提供了一种标准模式下的显示设备与服务器的交互示意图。参见图42,显示设备即教育触控电视,可分别与用户及服务器进行交互,其中,服务器可包括网关、在线子系统、运营子系统、会员子系统、以及内容推荐子系统。In order to further describe the response method of the display device to the user operation, an embodiment of the present application also provides a schematic diagram of the interaction between the display device and the server in the standard mode. Referring to FIG. 42, the display device is an educational touch TV, which can interact with the user and the server respectively, where the server can include a gateway, an online subsystem, an operation subsystem, a membership subsystem, and a content recommendation subsystem.
在一些实施例中,用户在标准模式的首页输入进入专题详情界面的专题详情指令后,显示设备可根据专题详情指令生成专题详情界面请求。在一些实施例中,专题详情界面请求可包括专题的ID信息,服务器可根据该ID信息得知终端在专题详情界面请求中请求的 是哪个专题的详情信息。In some embodiments, after the user inputs the topic details instruction to enter the topic details interface on the homepage of the standard mode, the display device may generate the topic details interface request according to the topic details instruction. In some embodiments, the topic details interface request may include topic ID information, and the server can know which topic details information is requested by the terminal in the topic details interface request according to the ID information.
显示设备将专题详情界面请求发送至网关,网关通过网关路由将专题详情界面请求转发至在线子系统,在线子系统可根据接收到专题详情界面请求,从运营子系统获取专题详情页的编排数据,从内容推荐子系统获取专题详情页的媒资数据。The display device sends the topic details interface request to the gateway, and the gateway forwards the topic details interface request to the online subsystem through the gateway route. The online subsystem can obtain the arrangement data of the topic details page from the operation subsystem according to the received topic details interface request. Obtain the media asset data of the topic details page from the content recommendation subsystem.
在一些实施例中,运营子系统可供运营人员设计并保存专题详情页,生成编排数据,将编排数据下发到在线子系统,编排数据可包括专题详情页的排版数据。进一步的,在一些实施例中,运营人员可为每个专题分配一个类型,该类型可表示为productCode,运营子系统在下发编排数据时,可一并下发该专题的productCode到在线子系统。例如,根据该专题的类型为XX,可下发“productCode#XX”到在线子系统。In some embodiments, the operation subsystem allows operators to design and save the topic details page, generate arrangement data, and deliver the arrangement data to the online subsystem. The arrangement data may include the typesetting data of the topic details page. Further, in some embodiments, the operator may assign a type to each topic, and the type may be represented as productCode. When the operation subsystem delivers the arrangement data, the productCode of the topic may be delivered to the online subsystem at the same time. For example, if the type of the topic is XX, "productCode#XX" can be issued to the online subsystem.
在一些实施例中,内容推荐子系统可存储有每个专题的媒资数据,内容推荐子系统可根据专题详情界面请求中的ID信息将用户选择专题的媒资数据下发至在线子系统。In some embodiments, the content recommendation subsystem may store the media asset data of each topic, and the content recommendation subsystem may deliver the media asset data of the topic selected by the user to the online subsystem according to the ID information in the topic details interface request.
在线子系统在接收到运营子系统下发的数据和内容推荐子系统下发的数据后,可根据这些数据生成专题详情页的数据,将专题详情页的数据返回至显示设备,显示设备根据专题详情页的数据绘制并展示专题详情界面。在一些实施例中,显示设备还将专题的productCode进行存储。After the online subsystem receives the data issued by the operation subsystem and the data issued by the content recommendation subsystem, it can generate the data on the topic details page based on these data, and return the data on the topic details page to the display device. The data on the detail page is drawn and the topic detail interface is displayed. In some embodiments, the display device also stores the productCode of the topic.
在一些实施例中,用户在专题详情页输入专题收藏指令后,显示设备根据专题收藏指令生成收藏请求。在一些实施例中,收藏请求可包括专题的ID信息和用户账号的ID信息。In some embodiments, after the user inputs a special collection instruction on the special topic details page, the display device generates a collection request according to the special collection instruction. In some embodiments, the collection request may include the ID information of the topic and the ID information of the user account.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可将相应专题的productCode添加到收藏请求中,例如,将“productCode#XX”添加到收藏请求中,然后将收藏请求通过网关发送至会员子系统。In some embodiments, the display device may add the productCode of the corresponding topic to the favorite request, for example, add "productCode#XX" to the favorite request, and then send the favorite request to the member subsystem through the gateway.
在一些实施例中,会员子系统可存储已登录账号的用户记录,其中,用户记录包括收藏记录,会员子系统将收藏请求中的专题的ID信息和用户账号的ID信息,将专题的ID信息和专题的productCode存储到相应用户的用户记录中,生成专题收藏数据。会员子系统在生成专题收藏数据后,可通过网关向显示设备反馈收藏成功信号,使显示设备将专题收藏控件刷新为显示“已收藏”,从而提示用户已收藏该专题。In some embodiments, the member subsystem may store user records of logged-in accounts, where the user records include favorite records. The member subsystem will bookmark the ID information of the topic in the request and the ID information of the user account, and combine the ID information of the topic. And the productCode of the topic is stored in the user record of the corresponding user, and the topic collection data is generated. After the member subsystem generates the special collection data, it can feed back a successful collection signal to the display device through the gateway, so that the display device refreshes the special collection control to display "favored", thereby prompting the user that the special topic has been favorited.
在一些实施例中,用户输入第一收藏展示指令后,显示设备根据第一收藏展示指令生成我的收藏-专题请求。为获取全部专题类型的收藏数据,显示设备可在我的收藏-专题请求中不设置productCode;或者,显示设备也可在我的收藏-专题请求中,设置所有类型的productCode,例如,根据全部专题类型为影视、教育、K歌和演员,在我的收藏-专题请求中设置productCode#影视、productCode#教育、productCode#K歌、productCode#演员。In some embodiments, after the user inputs the first collection display instruction, the display device generates a my collection-topic request according to the first collection display instruction. In order to obtain the collection data of all the topic types, the display device can not set the productCode in my collection-topic request; or, the display device can also set all types of productCode in the my collection-topic request, for example, according to all topics The types are film and television, education, karaoke and actor, and set productCode#电影、productCode#教育、productCode#K歌、productCode#actor in my collection-topic request.
显示设备通过网关路由,将我的收藏-专题请求发送到在线子系统后,在线子系统根据接收到我的收藏-专题请求,获取全部专题类型收藏数据。After the display device is routed through the gateway and sends my collection-topic request to the online subsystem, the online subsystem obtains all topic-type collection data according to the received my collection-topic request.
在一些实施例中,在线子系统可根据不设置productCode的我的收藏-专题请求,或者根据设置所有类型的productCode的我的收藏-专题请求,从会员子系统中调取用户账号下全部专题类型收藏数据,将全部专题类型收藏数据返回至显示设备。In some embodiments, the online subsystem can retrieve all topic types under the user account from the member subsystem according to my collection-topic request without productCode, or according to my collection-topic request with all types of productCode set Collection data, return all thematic type collection data to the display device.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可根据全部专题类型收藏数据中的productCode,绘制专题类型控件,例如,根据全部专题类型收藏数据中包括4个productCode,分别为:productCode# 影视、productCode#教育、productCode#K歌、productCode#演员,可绘制4个专题类型控件:影视、教育、K歌、演员,将每个专题类型控件配置为响应于触发时返回数据为该类型的专题收藏数据。In some embodiments, the display device can draw thematic type controls according to the productCode in all thematic type collection data. For example, the collection data according to all thematic types includes 4 productCodes, namely: productCode# 视频, productCode#教育, productCode #K歌、productCode#Actors, you can draw 4 thematic type controls: film, education, K song, actor, each thematic type control is configured to respond to the trigger when the return data is that type of thematic collection data.
在一些实施例中,显示设备还可直接绘制全部专题类型控件,如果一个专题类型控件没有对应的专题收藏数据,则将该专题类型控件配置为响应于触发时返回数据为空。In some embodiments, the display device can also directly draw all thematic type controls. If a thematic type control does not have corresponding thematic collection data, the thematic type control is configured to return empty data in response to a trigger.
在一些实施例中,用户可通过在标准模式的首页触控模式切换控件等方式将显示设备从标准模式切换至教育模式。In some embodiments, the user can switch the display device from the standard mode to the education mode by touching the control mode switch on the home page of the standard mode.
在教育模式下,用户与教育触控电视的交互也包括对专题进行操作时的交互,如获取详情页、收藏专题以及在收藏界面查找专题时与显示设备进行交互。参见图43,为根据一些实施例的教育模式下用户与显示设备的交互方法的流程示意图,如图43所示,该交互方法可包括如下步骤:In the education mode, the user's interaction with the educational touch TV also includes the interaction when operating the topic, such as obtaining the details page, favorite topics, and interacting with the display device when searching for topics on the favorite interface. Refer to FIG. 43, which is a schematic flowchart of a method for interaction between a user and a display device in an education mode according to some embodiments. As shown in FIG. 43, the interaction method may include the following steps:
步骤S201D:接收用户输入的专题详情指令,响应于所述专题详情指令,从服务器中获取所述专题详情指令对应专题的详情数据,以及所述专题详情指令对应专题的专题类型,根据所述详情数据控制所述显示器显示专题详情界面,并存储所述专题类型。Step S201D: Receive the topic detail instruction input by the user, and in response to the topic detail instruction, obtain the topic detail data of the topic corresponding to the topic detail instruction and the topic type of the topic corresponding to the topic detail instruction from the server, according to the details The data controls the display to display the topic details interface, and stores the topic type.
在一些实施例中,用户可在教育模式的首页输入专题详情指令。其中,首页的数据由用户进入首页时服务器下发到显示设备,服务器下发的数据可包括第二模式标识,如预设专题类型的productcode,在第二场景模式为教育模式时,预设专题类型可为教育类型。In some embodiments, the user can input the topic details instruction on the homepage of the education mode. Among them, the data of the homepage is delivered by the server to the display device when the user enters the homepage. The data delivered by the server may include the second mode identifier, such as the productcode of the preset topic type. When the second scene mode is the education mode, the preset topic The type can be an education type.
在一些实施例中,用户可在教育模式的首页输入专题详情指令。参见图44,为根据一些实施例的教育模式的首页示意图,如图44所示,教育模式的首页可展示导航栏和推荐位。导航栏可展示多个栏目控件,如“我的”、“分类”、“学知识”、“讲英语”、“读绘本”、“听音频”、“看动画”、“唱儿歌”和“应用”。In some embodiments, the user can input the topic details instruction on the homepage of the education mode. Refer to FIG. 44, which is a schematic diagram of the home page of the education mode according to some embodiments. As shown in FIG. 44, the home page of the education mode can display a navigation bar and recommended positions. The navigation bar can display multiple column controls, such as "my", "category", "knowledge", "speak English", "read picture book", "listen to audio", "watch animation", "sing children's songs" and " application".
在一些实施例中,首页上方可设置有模式切换控件,在教育模式下,模式切换控件可显示为“教育模式”,用户可对模式切换控件进行触控,显示设备响应于用户对模式切换控件的触控信号,将当前页面切换为标准模式的首页,用户还可通过遥控器遥控等方式对显示设备进行模式切换。在一些实施例中,模式切换控件响应于触控或遥控器触发时可弹出模式选择窗口,提供多种场景模式供用户选择。In some embodiments, a mode switching control may be provided on the top of the homepage. In the education mode, the mode switching control may be displayed as "education mode", the user may touch the mode switching control, and the display device responds to the user's control of the mode switching control. The touch signal can switch the current page to the home page in the standard mode, and the user can also switch the mode of the display device through remote control and other methods. In some embodiments, the mode switching control may pop up a mode selection window when triggered by a touch or a remote control, and provide multiple scene modes for the user to select.
推荐位可设置在导航栏上方,可展示一些操作控件或推荐媒资,操作控件如“VIP购买”、“教育点卡”、“客服电话”和“本机信息”等响应于触发时可展示相应的功能页。操作控件的触发方式可包括触控触发、遥控器触发或语音指令触发。推荐媒资可包括一个独立媒资或一个专题,如:媒资5、媒资6、媒资7、媒资8、专题E、专题F、专题G和专题H。在教育模式下,推荐媒资均为教育类型的媒资。The recommended position can be set at the top of the navigation bar to display some operation controls or recommended media assets. Operation controls such as "VIP purchase", "Education Point Card", "Customer Service Phone" and "Local Information" can be displayed in response to a trigger The corresponding function page. The trigger mode of the operation control may include touch trigger, remote control trigger, or voice command trigger. Recommended media assets can include an independent media asset or a topic, such as: media asset 5, media asset 6, media asset 7, media asset 8, topic E, topic F, topic G, and topic H. Under the educational model, recommended media assets are all educational media assets.
在一些实施例中,用户输入专题详情指令的方式可包括:在显示设备的触控屏上点击一个专题,或通过遥控器选中一个专题并确认,或通过语音指令指示显示设备打开一个专题。In some embodiments, the way for the user to input the topic details instruction may include: clicking a topic on the touch screen of the display device, or selecting and confirming a topic through the remote control, or instructing the display device to open a topic through a voice command.
在一些实施例中,显示设备的控制器可将触控屏接收到的某个专题显示区域的触控信号作为专题详情指令,或将遥控器发送的对应某个专题显示区域的控制信号作为专题详情 指令,或将语音指令中识别出的打开某个专题的命令作为专题详情指令。响应于专题详情指令,显示设备可获取专题详情指令对应专题的ID信息,根据专题的ID信息向服务器请求该专题的详情数据以及该专题的专题类型,将专题类型进行本地存储。In some embodiments, the controller of the display device may use the touch signal of a certain topic display area received by the touch screen as the topic detail instruction, or use the control signal corresponding to a certain topic display area sent by the remote control as the topic The detailed command, or the command to open a topic recognized in the voice command as the topic detailed command. In response to the topic detail instruction, the display device may obtain the ID information of the topic corresponding to the topic detail instruction, request the server for the detailed data of the topic and the topic type of the topic according to the topic ID information, and store the topic type locally.
在一些实施例中,显示设备根据专题的详情数据可生成如图45所示的专题详情界面。参见图45,该专题详情界面为专题E的详情页,专题详情界面可展示专题海报、专题说明、专题媒资和专题收藏控件,其中,专题收藏控件可位于专题详情页的右上角,当用户未收藏该专题时,专题收藏控件可显示“收藏”,从而提示用户可收藏该专题。专题海报可铺满专题详情界面,专题介绍可包括对该专题的文字说明,专题媒资的数量可包括多个,如媒资E1、媒资E2、媒资E3、媒资E4、媒资E5、媒资E6、媒资E7和媒资E8。In some embodiments, the display device may generate the theme details interface as shown in FIG. 45 according to the detailed data of the theme. See Figure 45. The topic details interface is the details page of topic E. The topic details interface can display topic posters, topic descriptions, topic media assets, and topic collection controls. The topic collection controls can be located in the upper right corner of the topic details page. When the topic is not favorited, the topic collection control can display "Favorite" to remind the user that the topic can be favorited. The topic poster can be filled with the topic details interface, the topic introduction can include a text description of the topic, and the number of the topic media assets can include multiple, such as media assets E1, media assets E2, media assets E3, media assets E4, and media assets E5 , Media Asset E6, Media Asset E7 and Media Asset E8.
步骤S202D:接收用户在专题详情界面输入的专题收藏指令,响应于所述专题收藏指令,获取所述专题收藏指令对应专题的类型,向服务器发送包含所述专题类型的收藏请求,使所述服务器生成并存储包含所述专题类型的专题收藏数据。Step S202D: Receive a special topic collection instruction input by the user on the topic details interface, in response to the topic collection instruction, obtain the topic type corresponding to the topic collection instruction, and send a collection request containing the topic type to the server, so that the server Generate and store thematic collection data containing the thematic type.
在一些实施例中,用户可在专题详情界面输入专题收藏指令。用户输入专题收藏指令的方式可包括:在显示设备的触控屏上点击专题收藏控件,或通过遥控器选中专题收藏控件并确认,或通过语音指令触发专题收藏控件。In some embodiments, the user can input a special topic collection instruction on the topic details interface. The way for the user to input the special collection instruction may include: clicking the special collection control on the touch screen of the display device, or selecting and confirming the special collection control through the remote control, or triggering the special collection control through a voice command.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可响应于专题收藏指令,获取步骤S101中存储的专题类型,向服务器发送包含所述专题类型的收藏请求,使服务器生成并存储包含专题类型的专题收藏数据。服务器完成专题收藏数据的存储后,可向显示设备返回收藏成功的信号,显示设备根据该收藏成功的信号,将专题收藏控件刷新为显示“已收藏”,从而提示用户已收藏该专题。In some embodiments, the display device may, in response to the special theme collection instruction, obtain the theme type stored in step S101, and send a collection request including the theme type to the server, so that the server generates and stores the theme collection data including the theme type. After the server completes the storage of the special collection data, it can return a successful collection signal to the display device, and the display device refreshes the special collection control to display "favored" according to the successful collection signal, thereby prompting the user that the special topic has been favorited.
用户在收藏该专题后,可在专题详情界面点开其中一个媒资进行观看,也可返回至首页,继续查看其它媒资。当然,用户也可先在专题详情界面中点开其中一个或多个媒资进行观看后,再返回专题详情界面,输入专题收藏指令将该专题进行收藏。After bookmarking the topic, the user can click on one of the media assets to watch it on the topic details interface, or return to the home page to continue to view other media assets. Of course, the user can also click on one or more of the media assets in the topic details interface to watch, and then return to the topic details interface and enter the topic collection instruction to bookmark the topic.
步骤S203D:接收所述用户输入的启动收藏界面的指令,响应于所述启动收藏界面的指令,根据所述预设专题类型的收藏数据控制所述显示器显示收藏界面。Step S203D: receiving the instruction to start the favorite interface input by the user, and in response to the instruction to start the favorite interface, controlling the display to display the favorite interface according to the favorite data of the preset topic type.
在一些实施例中,用户可从教育模式的首页触发“我的”栏目控件,进入“我的”栏目界面,“我的”栏目界面可设置有收藏展示控件,用户可输入第二收藏展示指令触发该收藏展示控件。用户输入第二收藏展示指令的方式可包括:在显示设备的触控屏上点击收藏展示控件,或通过遥控器选中收藏展示控件并确认,或通过语音指令触发收藏展示控件。In some embodiments, the user can trigger the "My" column control from the homepage of the education mode to enter the "My" column interface. The "My" column interface can be provided with a collection display control, and the user can input a second collection display instruction Trigger the collection display control. The way for the user to input the second collection display instruction may include: clicking the collection display control on the touch screen of the display device, or selecting the collection display control through the remote control and confirming it, or triggering the collection display control through a voice command.
在一些实施例中,当所述显示设备处于第二场景模式下时,显示设备对启动收藏界面的指令的响应方法如下:In some embodiments, when the display device is in the second scene mode, the display device responds to the instruction to start the favorite interface as follows:
当所述显示设备处于第二场景模式下时,所述控制器向所述服务器发送第二收藏展示指令,所述第二收藏指令用于从服务器中获取所述用户的预设专题类型的收藏数据;接收所述用户的预设专题类型的收藏数据;根据所述预设专题类型的收藏数据控制所述显示器显示所述收藏界面。When the display device is in the second scene mode, the controller sends a second favorite display instruction to the server, and the second favorite instruction is used to obtain the user's preset topic type favorites from the server Data; receiving the collection data of the user's preset topic type; controlling the display to display the collection interface according to the collection data of the preset topic type.
在一些实施例中,服务器接收到第二收藏指令后,从第二收藏指令中提取出第二模式 标识,发送与第二模式标识对应的预设专题类型,如教育类型的收藏数据到显示设备。In some embodiments, after receiving the second collection instruction, the server extracts the second mode identifier from the second collection instruction, and sends the preset topic type corresponding to the second mode identifier, such as the collection data of the education type, to the display device .
在一些实施例中,显示设备的控制器根据预设专题类型的收藏数据生成收藏界面,并控制显示器显示该收藏界面,该收藏界面也可称为第二收藏界面。In some embodiments, the controller of the display device generates the collection interface according to the collection data of the preset topic type, and controls the display to display the collection interface, which may also be referred to as the second collection interface.
在一些实施例中,当所述显示设备处于第二场景模式下时,显示设备可根据用户输入的启动收藏界面的指令,向服务器发送第二收藏展示指令。为根据一些实施例的第二收藏指令发送方法的流程示意图,该发送方法可包括:In some embodiments, when the display device is in the second scene mode, the display device may send the second collection display instruction to the server according to the instruction input by the user to start the collection interface. It is a schematic flowchart of a second method for sending a collection instruction according to some embodiments, and the sending method may include:
响应于所述启动收藏界面的指令,获取第二模式标识,所述第二模式标识是在所述显示设备加载所述第二场景模式的主页时从所述服务器获取到的;根据所述第二模式标识,生成第二收藏展示指令,所述第二收藏展示指令包含所述第二模式标识;发送所述第二收藏展示指令给所述服务器。In response to the instruction to start the favorite interface, a second mode identifier is acquired, the second mode identifier is acquired from the server when the display device loads the homepage of the second scene mode; according to the first The second mode identification, generating a second collection display instruction, the second collection display instruction includes the second mode identification; and the second collection display instruction is sent to the server.
在一些实施例中,用户在进入第二场景模式的主页时,服务器会向显示设备下发媒资推荐数据,使显示设备根据媒资推荐数据生成主页。媒资推荐数据可包括第二模式标识,第二模式标识可包括预设专题类型的productcode(产品代码),如productCode#教育。显示设备将第二模式标识进行存储,在用户在输入启动收藏界面的指令后,获取第二模式标识。In some embodiments, when the user enters the homepage of the second scene mode, the server will issue media asset recommendation data to the display device, so that the display device generates the homepage based on the media asset recommendation data. The media asset recommendation data may include a second mode identifier, and the second mode identifier may include a productcode (product code) of a preset topic type, such as productCode#Education. The display device stores the second mode identifier, and obtains the second mode identifier after the user inputs an instruction to start the favorite interface.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可根据获取到的第二模式标识,生成包括该第二模式标识的二收藏指令。In some embodiments, the display device may generate a second collection instruction including the second mode identifier according to the acquired second mode identifier.
在一些实施例中,显示设备在生成第二收藏指令后,将第二收藏指令发送给服务器。In some embodiments, the display device sends the second favorite instruction to the server after generating the second favorite instruction.
参见图46,为根据一些实施例的第二收藏界面的示意图,如图46所示,第二收藏界面可为教育专题的收藏界面,可设置有专题导航栏,专题导航栏可包括两个专题类型控件,如“教育”和“专题”,这两个专题类型控件响应于触发时均可在该第二收藏界面展示教育专题类型的收藏数据。Refer to FIG. 46, which is a schematic diagram of a second collection interface according to some embodiments. As shown in FIG. 46, the second collection interface can be a collection interface of an education topic, and can be provided with a topic navigation bar, and the topic navigation bar can include two topics. Type controls, such as "education" and "topic", these two topic type controls can display the collection data of the education topic type on the second collection interface in response to triggering.
为对显示设备对用户操作的响应方法做进一步描述,本申请实施例还提供了一种教育模式下的显示设备及服务器的交互示意图。In order to further describe the response method of the display device to the user operation, an embodiment of the present application also provides a schematic diagram of interaction between the display device and the server in the education mode.
参见图47,为根据一些实施例的教育模式下的显示设备与服务器的交互示意图,如图47所示,服务器可包括网关、在线子系统、运营子系统、会员子系统、以及内容推荐子系统。Refer to FIG. 47, which is a schematic diagram of the interaction between the display device and the server in the education mode according to some embodiments. As shown in FIG. 47, the server may include a gateway, an online subsystem, an operation subsystem, a membership subsystem, and a content recommendation subsystem. .
在一些实施例中,用户在教育模式的首页输入进入专题详情界面的专题详情指令后,显示设备可根据专题详情指令生成专题详情界面请求。在一些实施例中,专题详情界面请求可包括专题的ID信息,服务器可根据该ID信息得知终端在专题详情界面请求中请求的是哪个专题的详情信息。In some embodiments, after the user inputs the topic details instruction to enter the topic details interface on the homepage of the education mode, the display device may generate the topic details interface request according to the topic details instruction. In some embodiments, the topic details interface request may include the ID information of the topic, and the server can know which topic details information is requested by the terminal in the topic details interface request according to the ID information.
显示设备将专题详情界面请求发送至网关,网关通过网关路由将专题详情界面请求转发至在线子系统,在线子系统可根据接收到专题详情界面请求,从运营子系统获取专题详情页的编排数据,从内容推荐子系统获取专题详情页的媒资数据。The display device sends the topic details interface request to the gateway, and the gateway forwards the topic details interface request to the online subsystem through the gateway route. The online subsystem can obtain the arrangement data of the topic details page from the operation subsystem according to the received topic details interface request. Obtain the media asset data of the topic details page from the content recommendation subsystem.
在一些实施例中,运营子系统可将编排数据下发到在线子系统,编排数据可包括专题详情页的排版数据。进一步的,在一些实施例中,运营人员可为每个专题分配一个类型, 该类型可表示为productCode,运营子系统在下发编排数据时,可一并下发该专题的productCode到在线子系统。由于在教育模式下,所有专题的专题类型均为教育,因此,运营子系统可下发“productCode#教育”到在线子系统。In some embodiments, the operation subsystem may deliver the layout data to the online subsystem, and the layout data may include the layout data of the topic details page. Further, in some embodiments, the operator may assign a type to each topic, and the type may be represented as productCode. When the operation subsystem delivers the arrangement data, the productCode of the topic may be sent to the online subsystem at the same time. Because in the education mode, all the topic types are education, therefore, the operation subsystem can issue "productCode#Education" to the online subsystem.
在一些实施例中,内容推荐子系统可存储有每个专题的媒资数据,内容推荐子系统可根据专题详情界面请求中的ID信息将用户选择专题的媒资数据下发至在线子系统。In some embodiments, the content recommendation subsystem may store the media asset data of each topic, and the content recommendation subsystem may deliver the media asset data of the topic selected by the user to the online subsystem according to the ID information in the topic details interface request.
在线子系统在接收到运营子系统下发的数据和内容推荐子系统下发的数据后,可根据这些数据生成专题详情页的数据,将专题详情页的数据返回至显示设备,显示设备根据专题详情页的数据绘制并展示专题详情界面。在一些实施例中,显示设备还将专题的productCode进行存储。After the online subsystem receives the data issued by the operation subsystem and the data issued by the content recommendation subsystem, it can generate the data on the topic details page based on these data, and return the data on the topic details page to the display device. The data on the detail page is drawn and the topic detail interface is displayed. In some embodiments, the display device also stores the productCode of the topic.
在一些实施例中,用户在专题详情页输入专题收藏指令后,显示设备根据专题收藏指令生成收藏请求。在一些实施例中,收藏请求可包括专题的ID信息和用户账号的ID信息。In some embodiments, after the user inputs a special collection instruction on the special topic details page, the display device generates a collection request according to the special collection instruction. In some embodiments, the collection request may include the ID information of the topic and the ID information of the user account.
在一些实施例中,显示设备可将相应专题的productCode添加到收藏请求中,例如,将“productCode#教育”添加到收藏请求中,然后将收藏请求通过网关发送至会员子系统。In some embodiments, the display device may add the productCode of the corresponding topic to the favorite request, for example, add "productCode#教育" to the favorite request, and then send the favorite request to the member subsystem through the gateway.
在一些实施例中,会员子系统可存储已登录账号的用户记录,其中,用户记录包括收藏记录,会员子系统将收藏请求中的专题的ID信息和用户账号的ID信息,将专题的ID信息和专题的productCode存储到相应用户的用户记录中,生成专题收藏数据。会员子系统在生成专题收藏数据后,可通过网关向显示设备反馈收藏成功信号,使显示设备将专题收藏控件刷新为显示“已收藏”,从而提示用户已收藏该专题。In some embodiments, the member subsystem may store user records of logged-in accounts, where the user records include favorite records. The member subsystem will bookmark the ID information of the topic in the request and the ID information of the user account, and combine the ID information of the topic. And the productCode of the topic is stored in the user record of the corresponding user, and the topic collection data is generated. After the member subsystem generates the special collection data, it can feed back a successful collection signal to the display device through the gateway, so that the display device refreshes the special collection control to display "favored", thereby prompting the user that the special topic has been favorited.
在一些实施例中,用户输入第二收藏展示指令后,显示设备根据第二收藏展示指令生成我的收藏-专题请求。显示设备根据教育模式下可显示的专题类型教育,在我的收藏-专题请求中设置productCode#教育。In some embodiments, after the user inputs the second collection display instruction, the display device generates a my collection-topic request according to the second collection display instruction. The display device sets the productCode#Education in the my collection-topic request according to the topic type education that can be displayed in the education mode.
显示设备通过网关路由,将我的收藏-专题请求发送到在线子系统后,在线子系统根据接收到我的收藏-专题请求,获取教育专题类型收藏数据,将教育专题类型收藏数据返回至显示设备。The display device is routed through the gateway, and after sending my collection-topic request to the online subsystem, the online subsystem obtains the education topic type collection data according to the received my collection-topic request, and returns the education topic type collection data to the display device .
显示设备根据教育专题类型收藏数据绘制图43所示的第二收藏界面,由图43可以看出,在教育模式下,用户仅能查看教育类型的收藏专题,避免查找收藏专题时被其他类型的专题干扰。The display device draws the second collection interface shown in Figure 43 according to the collection data of the educational topic type. It can be seen from Figure 43 that in the education mode, the user can only view the collection topics of the education type, avoiding being caught by other types of collection topics when searching for collection topics. Thematic interference.
根据上述实施例中介绍的标准模式和教育模式下的交互过程,用户在查看收藏的专题时,显示设备可响应于所述启动收藏界面的指令,获取模式标识,所述模式标识是在所述显示设备加载当前场景模式的主页时从所述服务器获取到的;根据所述模式标识,生成收藏展示指令,所述收藏展示指令包括包含第一模式标识的第一收藏展示指令,或包含所述第二模式标识的第二收藏展示指令,所述第一模式标识表征的模式和所述第二模式标识表征的模式不同;发送所述收藏展示指令给所述服务器以使所述服务器反馈收藏数据;接收所述收藏数据,其中,在所述收藏展示指令为所述第一收藏展示指令时,所述收藏数据包括全部专题类型的收藏数据,在所述收藏展示指令为所述第二收藏展示指令时,所述收藏数据包括预设专题类型的收藏数据;在所述收藏界面展示所述收藏数据。According to the interaction process in the standard mode and the education mode introduced in the above embodiment, when the user is viewing a favorite topic, the display device can respond to the instruction to start the favorite interface to obtain a mode identifier, where the mode identifier is in the It is obtained from the server when the display device loads the homepage of the current scene mode; according to the mode identifier, a collection display instruction is generated, and the collection display instruction includes a first collection display instruction including a first mode identifier, or includes the The second collection display instruction identified by the second mode identifier, the mode represented by the first mode identifier and the mode represented by the second mode identifier are different; the collection display instruction is sent to the server so that the server feeds back the collection data Receiving the collection data, wherein, when the collection display instruction is the first collection display instruction, the collection data includes collection data of all thematic types, and the collection display instruction is the second collection display When instructed, the collection data includes collection data of a preset topic type; the collection data is displayed on the collection interface.
由上述实施例可见,本申请实施例通过在显示设备的第一场景模式的第一收藏界面展示全部专题类型的收藏数据,使得用户可查看不同专题类型的收藏数据;通过在显示设备的第二场景模式的第二收藏界面只展示预设专题类型的收藏数据,方便用户查看预设专题类型的收藏数据,不受其他专题类型的收藏数据的干扰,有利于提升用户查找专题收藏数据时的用户体验;进一步的,在第一场景模式下按照专题类型展示收藏数据,方便用户查看不同类型的收藏数据。It can be seen from the above-mentioned embodiment that the embodiment of the present application displays all the collection data of the topic type on the first collection interface of the first scene mode of the display device, so that the user can view the collection data of different topic types; The second collection interface of the scene mode only displays the collection data of the preset topic type, which is convenient for the user to view the collection data of the preset topic type, and is not interfered by the collection data of other topic types, which is beneficial to the user when searching for the topic collection data. Experience; further, in the first scene mode, the collection data is displayed according to thematic type, which is convenient for users to view different types of collection data.
需要说明的是,为了实现在标准模式与教育模式之间进行切换,在上述示意性切换方式的基础上,本领域技术人员在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,所联想到的其他切换方式,均属于本申请的保护范围。同理,上述切换方式也同样适用与从教育模式切换至标准模式,具体的切换方式相同,不再赘述。It should be noted that in order to switch between the standard mode and the education mode, based on the above-mentioned schematic switching method, those skilled in the art can associate with other switching methods without creative work. It belongs to the protection scope of this application. In the same way, the above switching method is also applicable to switching from the education mode to the standard mode, and the specific switching method is the same, and will not be repeated.
进一步地,由于教育模式是一种相对使用频率不高的操作模式,因此在教育模式下还可以设置更加简单的模式切换方式。例如,如图26所示,在教育模式主页的左下角位置还可以设置退出控件,当用户点击后,直接退出教育模式进入标准模式。Further, since the education mode is an operation mode that is relatively infrequently used, a simpler mode switching method can also be set in the education mode. For example, as shown in Figure 26, an exit control can also be set in the lower left corner of the education mode homepage, and when the user clicks, it will directly exit the education mode and enter the standard mode.
基于上述内容,本申请提供一种显示设备教育模式显示方法,包括:Based on the above content, the present application provides a display device education mode display method, including:
在完成显示开机导航后,获取用户输入的模式选择指令,所述模式选择指令用于指示显示设备的操作模式;所述操作模式包括标准模式和教育模式;After completing the display boot navigation, acquiring the mode selection instruction input by the user, the mode selection instruction is used to indicate the operation mode of the display device; the operation mode includes a standard mode and an education mode;
如果所述模式选择指令指示启动教育模式,显示密码输入界面;If the mode selection instruction instructs to start the education mode, display the password input interface;
获取用户在所述密码输入界面输入的密码信息,以及验证所述密码信息;Acquiring the password information entered by the user on the password input interface, and verifying the password information;
如果所述密码信息验证通过,显示年级选择界面;If the password information is verified, the grade selection interface is displayed;
获取用户在所述年级选择界面选定的年级选项信息;Acquiring the grade option information selected by the user on the grade selection interface;
向服务发送包含所述年级选项信息的主页请求,以及接收所述服务器返回的主页配置文件;Sending a homepage request containing the grade option information to the service, and receiving a homepage configuration file returned by the server;
根据所述主页配置文件控制显示教育模式主页。The education mode homepage is controlled to be displayed according to the homepage configuration file.
可选的,如果所述模式选择指令指示启动教育模式,所述方法还包括:Optionally, if the mode selection instruction instructs to start the education mode, the method further includes:
检测显示设备的网络连接状态;Check the network connection status of the display device;
如果所述显示设备未连接网络,控制显示离线教育模式主页;If the display device is not connected to the network, control the display of the offline education mode homepage;
如果所述显示设备已连接网络,执行获取用户在所述密码输入界面输入的密码信息的步骤。If the display device is connected to the network, perform the step of obtaining the password information input by the user on the password input interface.
可选的,所述方法还包括:Optionally, the method further includes:
如果所述模式选择指令指示启动标准模式,控制显示标准模式主页。If the mode selection instruction instructs to start the standard mode, the control displays the standard mode homepage.
可选的,根据所述主页配置文件控制显示教育模式主页的步骤后,所述方法还包括:Optionally, after controlling the step of displaying the education mode homepage according to the homepage configuration file, the method further includes:
获取用户输入的切换模式指令;Obtain the switch mode instruction input by the user;
控制显示标准模式主页。Control the display of the standard mode homepage.
可选的,所述切换模式指令的输入方式包括:Optionally, the input mode of the switching mode instruction includes:
通过控制装置按键输入;Input through the keys of the control device;
通过点击所述教育模式主页上的切换模式控件输入;Input by clicking the switch mode control on the homepage of the education mode;
通锅显示设备内置的语音系统输入;The built-in voice system input of the pot display device;
通过点击全局菜单中的切换模式控件输入。Input by clicking the switch mode control in the global menu.
由以上技术方案可知,本申请提供一种显示设备教育模式显示方法,所述方法在完成显示开机导航后,先获取用户输入的模式选择指令,如果所述模式选择指令指示启动教育模式,显示密码输入界面、年级选择界面;并且通过获取用户在所述年级选择界面选定的年级选项信息;向服务发送包含所述年级选项信息的主页请求,以及接收所述服务器返回的主页配置文件,以根据所述主页配置文件控制显示教育模式主页。所述方法可以基于远程教育形式,专门提供一种教育模式,以解决传统智能电视远程教育形式单一的问题。It can be seen from the above technical solutions that this application provides a display device education mode display method. The method first obtains the mode selection instruction input by the user after completing the display boot navigation. If the mode selection instruction indicates to start the education mode, display the password Input interface, grade selection interface; and by obtaining the grade option information selected by the user in the grade selection interface; sending a homepage request containing the grade option information to the service, and receiving the homepage configuration file returned by the server, according to The homepage configuration file controls the display of the education mode homepage. The method can be based on the form of distance education, specifically providing an education mode to solve the problem of the single form of traditional smart TV distance education.
由于以上实施方式均是在其他方式之上引用结合进行说明,不同实施例之间均具有相同的部分,本说明书中各个实施例之间相同、相似的部分互相参见即可。在此不再详细阐述。Since the above embodiments are all described by reference and combination in other ways, different embodiments have the same parts, and the same and similar parts between the various embodiments in this specification can be referred to each other. I will not elaborate on it here.
本申请提供的实施例之间的相似部分相互参见即可,以上提供的具体实施方式只是本申请总的构思下的几个示例,并不构成本申请保护范围的限定。对于本领域的技术人员而言,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下依据本申请方案所扩展出的任何其他实施方式都属于本申请的保护范围。The similar parts between the embodiments provided in this application can be referred to each other. The specific implementations provided above are only a few examples under the general concept of this application, and do not constitute a limitation of the protection scope of this application. For those skilled in the art, any other implementation manners expanded according to the scheme of this application without creative work shall fall within the protection scope of this application.

Claims (13)

  1. 一种显示设备,其特征在于,包括:A display device, characterized in that it comprises:
    显示器,被配置为显示应用程序界面;The display is configured to display the application program interface;
    通信器,被配置为与服务器进行数据通信;The communicator is configured to perform data communication with the server;
    控制器,被配置为:The controller is configured as:
    接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Receive control instructions for displaying the application program interface;
    在标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据全部本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表;In the standard mode, in response to the control instruction, generate an application list in the application program interface according to all local applications;
    在非标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据在预置可展示应用列表中的本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表,其中所述预置可展示应用列表和所述非标准模式相对应。In the non-standard mode, in response to the control instruction, the application list in the application program interface is generated according to the local applications in the preset displayable application list, wherein the preset displayable application list is similar to the non-standard mode correspond.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,其特征在于,在非标准模式时,所述控制器被进一步配置为:The display device according to claim 1, wherein in the non-standard mode, the controller is further configured to:
    响应于所述控制指令,从服务器中获取当前非标准模式对应的可展示应用列表;In response to the control instruction, obtain from the server a displayable application list corresponding to the current non-standard mode;
    根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用;Match the local application in the displayable application list according to the package name information;
    如果在所述可展示应用列表中匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,在所述应用程序界面中显示所述本地应用。If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, the local application is displayed in the application program interface.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的显示设备,其特征在于,在非标准模式时,所述控制器被进一步配置为:The display device according to claim 2, wherein in the non-standard mode, the controller is further configured to:
    向所述服务器发送显示请求,所述显示请求包括当前场景信息;Sending a display request to the server, where the display request includes current scene information;
    接收所述服务器反馈的可展示应用列表,所述可展示应用列表为所述服务器根据所述当前场景信息筛选的应用列表。Receive a displayable application list fed back by the server, where the displayable application list is an application list filtered by the server according to the current scene information.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的显示设备,其特征在于,所述显示请求还包括用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息,所述控制器被进一步配置为:The display device according to claim 3, wherein the display request further includes user information, device information, and subscription information, and the controller is further configured to:
    从所述服务器中获取推荐应用列表,所述推荐应用列表为所述服务器根据所述用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息计算的应用列表,包括多个应用图标以及每个应用对应的下载链接;Obtaining a recommended application list from the server, where the recommended application list is an application list calculated by the server according to the user information, device information, and subscription information, including multiple application icons and download links corresponding to each application;
    为所述推荐应用列表中预设数量的推荐应用的应用图标添加推荐标识;Adding recommendation marks to application icons of a preset number of recommended applications in the recommended application list;
    将添加推荐标识的应用图标与可展示应用列表中的本地应用的应用图标混合排列,以及在所述应用程序界面中显示混合排列后的应用图标。The application icons to which the recommendation mark is added are mixedly arranged with the application icons that can display the local applications in the application list, and the mixedly arranged application icons are displayed in the application program interface.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的显示设备,其特征在于,所述控制器被进一步配置为:The display device according to claim 4, wherein the controller is further configured to:
    根据在所述应用程序界面中显示的所述本地应用的数量计算所述预设数量;Calculating the preset number according to the number of the local applications displayed in the application program interface;
    在所述推荐应用列表中,提取与所述预设数量相等的应用图标及其下载链接。From the recommended application list, extract application icons and their download links equal to the preset number.
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的显示设备,其特征在于,所述控制器被进一步配置为:The display device according to claim 4, wherein the controller is further configured to:
    接收对应应用列表中应用控件的选中指令;Receive the selection instruction of the application control in the corresponding application list;
    在所述应用控件为本地应用时,响应于所述选中指令,打开对应的本地应用;When the application control is a local application, in response to the selection instruction, open the corresponding local application;
    在所述应用控件为推荐应用时,响应于所述选中指令,访问所述推荐应用的下载链接,以获取所述推荐应用的安装文件。When the application control is a recommended application, in response to the selection instruction, access the download link of the recommended application to obtain the installation file of the recommended application.
  7. 根据权利要求1所述的显示设备,其特征在于,所述控制器被进一步配置为:The display device according to claim 1, wherein the controller is further configured to:
    接收用于切换显示模式的切换指令;Receive a switching instruction for switching the display mode;
    响应于所述切换指令,切换当前显示模式,包括:In response to the switching instruction, switching the current display mode includes:
    如果当前显示模式为标准模式,切换显示模式为非标准模式,以及显示非标准模式下的应用程序界面;If the current display mode is the standard mode, switch the display mode to the non-standard mode, and display the application program interface in the non-standard mode;
    如果当前显示模式为非标准模式,切换显示模式为标准模式,以及显示标准模式下的应用程序界面。If the current display mode is non-standard mode, switch the display mode to standard mode, and display the application program interface in standard mode.
  8. 一种显示设备,其特征在于,包括:A display device, characterized in that it comprises:
    显示器,被配置为显示应用程序界面;The display is configured to display the application program interface;
    通信器,被配置为与服务器进行数据通信;The communicator is configured to perform data communication with the server;
    控制器,被配置为:The controller is configured as:
    接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Receive control instructions for displaying the application program interface;
    响应于所述控制指令,从服务器中获取可展示应用列表;In response to the control instruction, obtain a list of displayable applications from the server;
    根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用;Match the local application in the displayable application list according to the package name information;
    如果在所述可展示应用列表中匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,在所述应用程序界面中显示所述本地应用;If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, display the local application in the application program interface;
    如果在所述可展示应用列表中未匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,隐藏所述本地应用。If the package name information of the local application is not matched in the displayable application list, the local application is hidden.
  9. 一种应用程序界面显示方法,其特征在于,包括:An application program interface display method, which is characterized in that it comprises:
    接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Receive control instructions for displaying the application program interface;
    在标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据全部本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表;In the standard mode, in response to the control instruction, generate an application list in the application program interface according to all local applications;
    在非标准模式时,响应于所述控制指令,根据在预置可展示应用列表中的本地应用生成应用程序界面中的应用列表,其中所述预置可展示应用列表和所述非标准模式相对应。In the non-standard mode, in response to the control instruction, the application list in the application program interface is generated according to the local applications in the preset displayable application list, wherein the preset displayable application list is similar to the non-standard mode correspond.
  10. 一种应用程序界面显示方法,其特征在于,包括:An application program interface display method, which is characterized in that it comprises:
    接收用于展示应用程序界面的控制指令;Receive control instructions for displaying the application program interface;
    响应于所述控制指令,从服务器中获取可展示应用列表;In response to the control instruction, obtain a list of displayable applications from the server;
    根据包名信息在所述可展示应用列表中匹配本地应用;Match the local application in the displayable application list according to the package name information;
    如果在所述可展示应用列表中匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,在所述应用程序界面中显示所述本地应用;If the package name information of the local application is matched in the displayable application list, display the local application in the application program interface;
    如果在所述可展示应用列表中未匹配到所述本地应用的包名信息,隐藏所述本地应用。If the package name information of the local application is not matched in the displayable application list, the local application is hidden.
  11. 一种服务器,其特征在于,包括:A server, characterized in that it comprises:
    运营子系统,被配置为生成可展示应用列表;Operational subsystem, which is configured to generate a list of displayable applications;
    推荐子系统,被配置为生成推荐应用列表;The recommendation subsystem is configured to generate a list of recommended applications;
    在线子系统,被配置为:The online subsystem is configured as:
    接收显示设备发送的显示请求;Receive the display request sent by the display device;
    响应于所述显示请求,从所述运营子系统获取可展示应用列表,以及从所述推荐子系统获取推荐应用列表;In response to the display request, obtaining a list of displayable applications from the operation subsystem, and obtaining a list of recommended applications from the recommendation subsystem;
    向显示设备发送所述可展示应用列表和所述推荐应用列表。Send the displayable application list and the recommended application list to a display device.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述服务器,其特征在于,所述显示请求包括当前场景信息,所述在线子系统被进一步配置为:The server according to claim 11, wherein the display request includes current scene information, and the online subsystem is further configured to:
    解析所述显示请求,以获取所述当前场景信息;Parsing the display request to obtain the current scene information;
    向所述运营子系统发送所述当前场景信息;Sending the current scene information to the operation subsystem;
    接收所述运营子系统反馈的可展示应用列表,所述可展示应用列表为所述运营子系统根据所述当前场景信息进行筛选而生成的应用列表。Receive a displayable application list fed back by the operation subsystem, where the displayable application list is an application list generated by the operation subsystem through filtering according to the current scene information.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述服务器,其特征在于,所述显示请求还包括用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息,所述在线子系统被进一步配置为:The server according to claim 11, wherein the display request further includes user information, device information, and subscription information, and the online subsystem is further configured to:
    解析所述显示请求,以获取所述用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息;Parsing the display request to obtain the user information, device information, and subscription information;
    向所述推荐子系统发送所述用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息;Sending the user information, device information, and subscription information to the recommendation subsystem;
    接收所述推荐子系统反馈的推荐应用列表,所述推荐应用列表为所述推荐子系统根据所述用户信息、设备信息以及订阅信息计算生成的应用列表。A recommended application list fed back by the recommendation subsystem is received, where the recommended application list is an application list calculated and generated by the recommendation subsystem according to the user information, device information, and subscription information.
PCT/CN2021/090332 2020-04-30 2021-04-27 Display device and application program interface display method WO2021218977A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180046333.6A CN116261857A (en) 2020-04-30 2021-04-27 Display equipment and application program interface display method

Applications Claiming Priority (12)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010364836.5 2020-04-30
CN202010364836 2020-04-30
CN202010523653.3 2020-06-10
CN202010523653.3A CN111669621B (en) 2020-04-30 2020-06-10 Media asset data issuing method, server and display device
CN202010544468.2A CN111770366A (en) 2020-04-30 2020-06-15 Message reissue method, server and display device
CN202010544468.2 2020-06-15
CN202010555094.4 2020-06-17
CN202010555094.4A CN111722768B (en) 2020-04-30 2020-06-17 Display device and application program interface display method
CN202010976268.4 2020-09-16
CN202010976268.4A CN112073787B (en) 2020-09-16 2020-09-16 Display device and home page display method
CN202011016939.9A CN112162809B (en) 2020-09-24 2020-09-24 Display device and user collection display method
CN202011016939.9 2020-09-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021218977A1 true WO2021218977A1 (en) 2021-11-04

Family

ID=78331784

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/090332 WO2021218977A1 (en) 2020-04-30 2021-04-27 Display device and application program interface display method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116261857A (en)
WO (1) WO2021218977A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114339327A (en) * 2021-12-29 2022-04-12 北京连屏科技有限公司 Media asset operation method and system
CN114845154A (en) * 2022-04-28 2022-08-02 四川虹魔方网络科技有限公司 Quick adaptation method of media asset data
CN115884167A (en) * 2022-03-25 2023-03-31 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 Data processing method, device, equipment and storage medium
CN116156043A (en) * 2023-04-03 2023-05-23 荣耀终端有限公司 Display method of application program recommendation bit, electronic device and readable storage medium

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114827244A (en) * 2022-03-10 2022-07-29 北京达佳互联信息技术有限公司 Configuration information issuing method and device and display content determining method and device

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104008350A (en) * 2014-05-15 2014-08-27 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 Mobile terminal and method entering different user modes in different unlocking ways
CN104796782A (en) * 2014-01-16 2015-07-22 深圳数字电视国家工程实验室股份有限公司 Method and device for controlling smart television
CN104917881A (en) * 2015-04-29 2015-09-16 努比亚技术有限公司 Multi-mode mobile terminal and implementation method thereof
CN105447355A (en) * 2015-11-09 2016-03-30 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Terminal application control method and terminal
US20190158919A1 (en) * 2015-09-30 2019-05-23 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for implementing a locked mode for viewing media assets
CN110929140A (en) * 2018-09-14 2020-03-27 奇酷互联网络科技(深圳)有限公司 Application recommendation method applied to mobile terminal, mobile terminal and storage device
CN111722768A (en) * 2020-04-30 2020-09-29 聚好看科技股份有限公司 Display device and application program interface display method

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014188593A1 (en) * 2013-05-24 2014-11-27 株式会社 東芝 Method, scene list output device, program, and server
CN106104600B (en) * 2014-01-10 2019-02-05 电子触控产品解决方案 Multi-mode electronic cash register device
CN103888833B (en) * 2014-03-11 2018-06-19 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 A kind of smart television accesses the method and system of TV programme and application program
CN106777116B (en) * 2016-12-15 2021-10-15 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Content acquisition method, user client, server and system
CN108200464A (en) * 2018-01-25 2018-06-22 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 Smart television and the method convenient for selecting educational class content
CN108391150A (en) * 2018-02-01 2018-08-10 深圳创维-Rgb电子有限公司 A kind of play mode setting method, smart television, system and storage device
CN108803970B (en) * 2018-05-08 2021-06-04 平安科技(深圳)有限公司 Scene matching display method and terminal equipment

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104796782A (en) * 2014-01-16 2015-07-22 深圳数字电视国家工程实验室股份有限公司 Method and device for controlling smart television
CN104008350A (en) * 2014-05-15 2014-08-27 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 Mobile terminal and method entering different user modes in different unlocking ways
CN104917881A (en) * 2015-04-29 2015-09-16 努比亚技术有限公司 Multi-mode mobile terminal and implementation method thereof
US20190158919A1 (en) * 2015-09-30 2019-05-23 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for implementing a locked mode for viewing media assets
CN105447355A (en) * 2015-11-09 2016-03-30 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Terminal application control method and terminal
CN110929140A (en) * 2018-09-14 2020-03-27 奇酷互联网络科技(深圳)有限公司 Application recommendation method applied to mobile terminal, mobile terminal and storage device
CN111722768A (en) * 2020-04-30 2020-09-29 聚好看科技股份有限公司 Display device and application program interface display method

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114339327A (en) * 2021-12-29 2022-04-12 北京连屏科技有限公司 Media asset operation method and system
CN114339327B (en) * 2021-12-29 2023-12-29 北京连屏科技有限公司 Media resource operation method and system
CN115884167A (en) * 2022-03-25 2023-03-31 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 Data processing method, device, equipment and storage medium
CN115884167B (en) * 2022-03-25 2023-08-22 北京字跳网络技术有限公司 Data processing method, device, equipment and storage medium
CN114845154A (en) * 2022-04-28 2022-08-02 四川虹魔方网络科技有限公司 Quick adaptation method of media asset data
CN114845154B (en) * 2022-04-28 2023-05-09 四川虹魔方网络科技有限公司 Quick adaptation method for media data
CN116156043A (en) * 2023-04-03 2023-05-23 荣耀终端有限公司 Display method of application program recommendation bit, electronic device and readable storage medium
CN116156043B (en) * 2023-04-03 2023-08-15 荣耀终端有限公司 Display method of application program recommendation bit, electronic device and readable storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116261857A (en) 2023-06-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021218977A1 (en) Display device and application program interface display method
WO2020000972A1 (en) Video access method, client, video access apparatus, terminal, server, and storage medium
CN111722768B (en) Display device and application program interface display method
WO2020000973A1 (en) Information access method, client, information access apparatus, terminal, server, and storage medium
CN103596020B (en) The mixing layout of TV programme and player method and system
CN102473191B (en) System and method for searching in internet on a video device
CN109688481B (en) Media navigation and playing method, device and computer readable media
CN113596590B (en) Display device and play control method
CN111510753B (en) Display device
JP2023502859A (en) Barrage processing method, device, electronic equipment and program
CN106489150A (en) For recognize and preserve media asset a part system and method
CN104995592A (en) Information processing apparatus and information processing method
US11706485B2 (en) Display device and content recommendation method
CN104081783A (en) Method and system for synchronising social messages with a content timeline
CN105027559A (en) Information processing apparatus and information processing method
US11924513B2 (en) Display apparatus and method for display user interface
WO2021052133A1 (en) Singing interface display method and display device, and server
CN110168541A (en) The system and method for eliminating word ambiguity based on static and temporal knowledge figure
TW201503670A (en) Intuitive image-based program guide for controlling display device such as a television
CN113391751A (en) Interface display method and device, storage medium and electronic equipment
TW201803357A (en) Internet multimedia system based on uniform resource locator and the method for establishing the same
CN103596034A (en) Control method and control device for desktop display of intelligent television
CN107710252A (en) System and method for the progress of from the other Consuming medias of user reminding to Consuming media
CN114040225B (en) Server, display equipment and media asset mapping method
CN113661715B (en) Service management method, interaction method, display equipment and mobile terminal for projection hall

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21796810

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A DATED 16.03.2023)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21796810

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1